IBM

ERserver
Eserver pSeries 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4
User’s Guide
SA38-0606-00

Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

 IBM
ERserver
Eserver pSeries 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4
User’s Guide
SA38-0606-00

Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

First Edition (July 2002)

Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Safety Notices” on page xi,
Appendix A, “Environmental Notices” on page 169, and Appendix B, “Notices” on page 171.
A reader’s comment form is provided at the back of this publication. If the form has been removed, address comments
to Information Development, Department H6DS-905-6C006, 11400 Burnet Road, Austin, Texas 78758-3493. To send
comments electronically, use this commercial internet address: [email protected]. Any information that you
supply may be used without incurring any obligation to you.
© International Business Machines Corporation, 2002. All rights reserved. Note to U.S. Government Users --
Documentation related to restricted rights -- Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth is GSA
ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Contents
Safety Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Rack Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Laser Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Laser Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Data Integrity and Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

About This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

ISO 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Online Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Ergonomic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii

Chapter 1. Introducing the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Bus Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Media Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Input/Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Chapter 2. Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Starting the System Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Stopping the System Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Reading the Operator Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Component LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Using the Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using the Three-Button Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Handling the Mouse Correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Caring for the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Cleaning the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Using the 3.5-Inch Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Write-Protecting 3.5-Inch Diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Loading and Unloading the 3.5-Inch Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Using the CD-ROM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Front View of CD-ROM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

iii
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Understanding the Status Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Handling Compact Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Other Handling Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Loading a Compact Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Opening the Tray Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Playing an Audio CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Using the Service Processor and Service Director Features . . . . . . . . . 23
Service Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Service Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Service Processor Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Accessing the Service Processor Menus Locally. . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Accessing the Service Processor Menus Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Saving and Restoring Service Processor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Menu Inactivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
General User Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Privileged User Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Service Processor Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
System Power Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
System Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Language Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Modem Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Serial Port Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Serial Port Speed Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Telephone Number Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Call-Out Policy Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Customer Account Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Call-out Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Service Processor Parameters in Service Mode (Full System Partition) . . . . . 57
System Power-On Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Boot (IPL) Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Failure During Boot Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Failure During Normal System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Service Processor Reboot/Restart Policy Controls . . . . . . . . . . . 61
System Firmware Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
General Information on System Firmware Updates . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Determining the Level of Firmware on the System . . . . . . . . . . . 64
System Firmware Update Using a Locally Available Image . . . . . . . . 64
Updating System Firmware From the Service Processor Menus . . . . . . 65
Updating System Firmware from the AIX Service Aids . . . . . . . . . . 65
Updating System Firmware from the AIX Command Line . . . . . . . . . 65
Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Configuring and Deconfiguring Processors or Memory . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Run-Time CPU Deconfiguration (CPU Gard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Service Processor System Monitoring - Surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . 67

iv Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

System Firmware Surveillance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Operating System Surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Call-Out (Call-Home) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Console Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Service Processor Error Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
LCD Progress Indicator Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Service Processor Operational Phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Pre-Standby Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Standby Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Bring-Up Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Runtime Phase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Chapter 4. Using System Management Services . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Password Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Display Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Remote Initial Program Load Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
IP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Adapter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
SCSI Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Select Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Multiboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Select Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Software Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Select Install Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Select Boot Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Multiboot Startup <OFF> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Select Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
OK Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Exiting System Management Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Chapter 5. Using the Standalone and Online Diagnostics . . . . . . . . 91

Standalone and Online Diagnostics Operating Considerations . . . . . . . . 91
Selecting a Console Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Identifying the Terminal Type to the Diagnostics Programs . . . . . . . . 91
Undefined Terminal Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Running Online Diagnostics from CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Running Standalone Diagnostics from a Network Installation Management (NIM)
Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Running Online Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Running the Diagnostics from a TTY Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Online Diagnostics Mode of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Running the Online Diagnostics in Service Mode (Service Mode IPL) . . . . . 97
Running the Online Diagnostics in Concurrent Mode . . . . . . . . . . 98
Running the Online Diagnostics in Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . 99
Running System Verification When Connected to an Hardware Management
Console (HMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Standalone Diagnostic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Running the Standalone Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Contents v
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids . . . . . . . . . . 103

Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Add Resource to Resource List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
AIX Shell Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Analyze Adapter Internal Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Backup and Restore Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Certify Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Change Hardware Vital Product Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Configure Dials and LPF Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Configure ISA Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Configure Reboot Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Configure Remote Maintenance Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Configure Ring Indicate Power-On Policy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Configure Ring Indicate Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Configure Service Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Surveillance Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Modem Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Call In/Out Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Site Specific Call In/Out Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Configure Surveillance Policy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Create Customized Configuration Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Delete Resource from Resource List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Disk Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Disk to Disk Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Display/Alter Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Display Configuration and Resource List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Display Firmware Device Node Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Display Hardware Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Display Hardware Vital Product Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Display Machine Check Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Display Microcode Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Display or Change Bootlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Display or Change Diagnostic Run-Time Options . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Display Previous Diagnostic Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Display Resource Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Display Service Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Display Software Product Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Display System Environmental Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Display Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Display USB Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Download Microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Download Microcode to PCI SCSI RAID Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Download Microcode to Disk Drive Attached to a PCI SCSI RAID Adapter 126
Download Microcode to a PCI FC-AL Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Download Microcode to DVD-RAM Attached to a PCI SCSI Adapter . . . . . 127
Download Microcode to Disk Attached to PCI SCSI Adapter . . . . . . . 127
Download Microcode to Other Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Fibre Channel RAID Service Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

vi Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Flash SK-NET FDDI Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Format Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Hardfile Attached to SCSI Adapter (non-RAID) . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Hardfile Attached to PCI SCSI RAID Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Optical Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Diskette Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Gather System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Generic Microcode Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Hot Plug Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
PCI Hot Plug Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
SCSI Hot Swap Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
RAID Hot Plug Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Local Area Network Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Log Repair Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Periodic Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
PCI RAID Physical Disk Identify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Process Supplemental Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Run Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Run Error Log Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Run Exercisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Exerciser Commands (CMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Memory Exerciser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Tape Exerciser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Diskette Exerciser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
CD-ROM Exerciser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Save or Restore Hardware Management Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Save or Restore Service Processor Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
SCSI Bus Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
SCSD Tape Drive Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Spare Sector Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
SSA Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
System Fault Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
System Identify Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Update Disk-Based Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Update System or Service Processor Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Update System Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7135 RAIDiant Array Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Command Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7318 Serial Communications Network Server Service Aid . . . . . . . . . 148

Chapter 7. Verifying the Hardware Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Running System Verification When Not Connected to an Hardware Management
Console (HMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Step 1. Considerations Before Running This Procedure . . . . . . . . . 149
Step 2. Loading the Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Step 3. Running the Verification Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Step 4. Performing Additional System Verification . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Step 5. Stopping the Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Running System Verification When Connected to an (HMC) . . . . . . . . 152

Contents vii
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Step 1. Running Online Diagnostics in Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . 152

Step 2. Running the Verification Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Step 3. Performing Additional System Verification . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Step 4. Stopping the Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Problem Determination Using the Standalone or Online Diagnostics . . . . . . 155
Step 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Problem Determination When Unable to Load Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . 162

Chapter 9. Repair Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Appendix A. Environmental Notices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Product Recycling and Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Environmental Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Acoustical Noise Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Declared Acoustical Noise Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Appendix B. Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Appendix C. General Attributes Required When Using a TTY Terminal . . . 173

Additional Communication Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Additional Keyboard Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Additional Printer Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Appendix D. Firmware Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Checking the Current Firmware Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Updating System Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Appendix E. Service Processor Setup and Test . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Service Processor Setup Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Testing the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Testing Call-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Testing Call-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Serial Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Appendix F. Modem Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Sample Modem Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Generic Modem Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Specific Modem Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Configuration File Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Examples for Using the Generic Sample Modem Configuration Files . . . . 186
Customizing the Modem Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
IBM 7852-400 DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Xon/Xoff Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Ring Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Terminal Emulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Recovery Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Transfer of a Modem Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

viii Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Recovery Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Prevention Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Modem Configuration Sample Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Sample File modem_m0.cfg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Sample File modem_m1.cfg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Sample File modem_z.cfg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Sample File modem_z0.cfg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Sample File modem_f.cfg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Sample File modem_f0.cfg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Sample File modem_f1.cfg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Contents ix
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

x Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Safety Notices
A danger notice indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential of causing
death or serious personal injury. Danger notices appear on the following pages:
v xii

A caution notice indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential of causing
moderate or minor personal injury. Caution notices appear on the following pages:
v xii
v xiii
v 19

Note: For a translation of these notices, see System Unit Safety Information, order
number SA23-2652.

Rack Safety Instructions

v Do not install this unit in a rack where the internal rack ambient temperatures will
exceed 40 degrees C.
v Do not install this unit in a rack where the air flow is compromised. Any side, front or
back of the unit used for air flow through the unit must not be in direct contact with
the rack.
v Care should be taken to ensure that a hazardous condition is not created due to
uneven mechanical loading when installing this unit in a rack. If the rack has a
stabilizer it must be firmly attached before installing or removing this unit.
v Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply
circuit so that overloading of circuits does not compromise the supply wiring or
overcurrent protection. To provide the correct power connection to the rack, refer to
the rating labels located on the equipment in the rack to determine the total power
requirement for the supply circuit.
v An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous voltage on the
metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the system. It is the
responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and
grounded to prevent an electrical shock.

xi
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Electrical Safety
Observe the following safety instructions any time you are connecting or disconnecting
devices attached to the workstation.

DANGER
An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous voltage
on metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the system. It is the
responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and
grounded to prevent an electrical shock.

Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power cables for
the system unit and all attached devices are unplugged.

When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the system,

ensure that the power cables for those devices are unplugged before the
signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the
existing system before you add a device.

Use one hand, when possible, to connect or disconnect signal cables to

prevent a possible shock from touching two surfaces with different electrical
potentials.

During an electrical storm, do not connect cables for display stations, printers,
telephones, or station protectors for communications lines.

CAUTION:
This product is equipped with a three-wire power cable and plug for the user’s
safety. Use this power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid
electrical shock.

DANGER
To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect all power cables from the
electrical outlet before relocating the system.

xii Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Laser Safety Information

CAUTION:
This product may contain a CD-ROM which is a class 1 laser product.

Laser Compliance
All lasers are certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR
Subchapter J for class 1 laser products. Outside the U.S., they are certified to be in
compliance with the IEC 825 (first edition 1984) as a class 1 laser product. Consult the
label on each part for laser certification numbers and approval information.

CAUTION:
All IBM laser modules are designed so that there is never any human access to
laser radiation above a class 1 level during normal operation, user maintenance,
or prescribed service conditions. Data processing environments can contain
equipment transmitting on system links with laser modules that operate at
greater than class 1 power levels. For this reason, never look into the end of an
optical fiber cable or open receptacle. Only trained service personnel should
perform the inspection or repair of optical fiber cable assemblies and receptacles.

Safety Notices xiii

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

xiv Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Data Integrity and Verification

IBM computer systems contain mechanisms designed to reduce the possibility of
undetected data corruption or loss. This risk, however, cannot be eliminated. Users who
experience unplanned outages, system failures, power fluctuations or outages, or
component failures must verify the accuracy of operations performed and data saved or
transmitted by the system at or near the time of the outage or failure. In addition, users
must establish procedures to ensure that there is independent data verification before
relying on such data in sensitive or critical operations. Users should periodically check
the IBM support websites for updated information and fixes applicable to the system and
related software.

xv
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

xvi Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

About This Book

This book provides information about the Eserver pSeries 630 Model 6C4 and Model
6E4, specifically how to use the system, use diagnostics and service aids, and verify
system operation. In this book, the Eserver pSeries 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4
are hereafter referred to as the ″system.″

ISO 9000
ISO 9000 registered quality systems were used in the development and manufacturing
of this product.

Online Publications
IBM Eserver pSeries publications are available online. To access the online books,
visit our Web site at: http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/pseries/library/hardware_docs/

Related Publications

The following publications provide additional information about your system unit:
v The Eserver pSeries 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 Installation Guide , order
number SA38-0597, contains information on how to set up and cable the system,
install and remove options, and verify system operation.
v The Eserver pSeries 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 Service Guide, order number
SA38-0599, contains reference information, maintenance analysis procedures
(MAPs), error codes, removal and replacement procedures, and a parts catalog.
v The RS/6000 Eserver pSeries Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems ,
order number SA38-0509, contains diagnostic information, service request numbers
(SRNs), and failing function codes (FFCs).
v The RS/6000 Eserver pSeries Adapters, Devices, and Cable Information for
Multiple Bus Systems, order number SA38-0516, contains information about
adapters, devices, and cables for your system. This manual is intended to
supplement the service information found in the RS/6000 Eserver pSeries
Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems .
v The Site and Hardware Planning Guide, order number SA38-0508, contains
information to help you plan your installation.
v The System Unit Safety Information, order number SA23-2652, contains translations
of safety information used throughout this book.
v The PCI Adapter Placement Reference, order number SA38-0538, contains
information regarding slot restrictions for adapters that can be used in this system.

xvii
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Ergonomic Information
After you have set up your system, we encourage you to visit the Healthy Computing
Web site. Good ergonomic practice is important to get the most from your workstation
and to avoid discomfort. This means that the equipment and the workplace should be
arranged to suit your individual needs and the kind of work you do.

The Healthy Computing Web site gives ergonomic guidelines to help you understand
the ergonomic considerations that you should know when working at a computer
workstation. The address is: http://www.us.pc.ibm.com/healthycomputing

Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in
the United States, other countries, or both:
v AIX
v IBM
v PowerPC
v pSeries
v e (logo)

Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of
others.

xviii Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Chapter 1. Introducing the System

This chapter provides information on the system features of the Eserver pSeries 630
Model 6C4 and Model 6E4. The Model 6C4 is a rack mount system and the Model 6E4
is a deskside system.

System Features

Bus Architecture
Four PCI slots are available. Each slot is 64-bit capable at 133 MHz, 3.3 volts. The PCI
slots are cablable of running either 64-bit or 32-bit adapters; however, a 32-bit adapter
operates in a 32-bit mode and shows no performance advantage while running in a
64-bit slot.

Processors
v One and two-way cards with POWER4 1.0 GHz GP microporcessors.

Note: Only a single 1-way card is allowed per server at a time, therefore a 3-way
configuration is unavailable
v An upgrade from a 1-way (FC 5131) to a 2-way (FC 5132) is by feature conversion.
v 32 MB L3 cache per processor card

Memory
1 GB to 16 GB ECC DDR SDRAM memory
v Memory DIMMs plug into the processor cards (8 DIMM slots per card).
v DIMMs must be populated in quads (a single memory feature already contains four
DIMMs.)
v Memory quads installed may consist of different memory sizes.
v A system with a single processor card (1- or 2-way) may have a maximum of 8 GB
of memory based on the maximum memory featue avbailable at the time of writing
this manual.

Media Drives
Two media bays (one CD-ROM or DVD-RAM must be configured on an initial order.
v Media bay one can accommodate an IDE CD-ROM or a SCSI DVD-RAM. (The
DVD-RAM will read CD-ROM installataion media.
v Medial bay two can accommodate a DVD-RAM, diskette drive or tape drive, contact
your sales representative to check the availablility of 8 mm tape drives.

Four hot-plug disk drive bays:

v 18.2 GB to 293.6 GB of disk storage

1
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v 18.2 GB Ultra3 10K RPM 1 inch, 36.4GB Ultra3 10K RPM 1 inch, 73.4 GB Ultra3
10K RPM 1 inch and a 36.4 GB Ultra3 15K RPM 1 inch are available at the time of
writing this manual. Contact your sales representative for a complete update listing of
hot-plug disk drive sizes.

Power supply
Up to two power supplies; the second power supply is for redundant power.
v AC input type 120V/240V
v Single phase

Keyboard
v Standard: 101-key enhanced keyboard
v 101/102 or 106-key enhanced keyboard

Mouse
v Three-button

Operator Panel
v 32-character LED diagnostics display
v LEDs for power on, attention, SCSI activity, and LAN activinity
v Buttons for power on, system reset and CSP reset

Input/Output Ports
v One 25-pin parallel
v Three serial ports. Serial port 1 (S1) has two physical connectors, one RJ-48 located
in front on the operator panel, and a 9-pin D-shell located on the rear of the chassis.
The other two serial connectors are located on the rear of the system chassis.
v Keyboard
v Mouse
v Two Ultra3 SCSI (one to internal 4-pack disk drive backplaen, one to external VHDCI
mini 68-pin port)
v Integrated Drive Electronics (IDE)
v Two 10/100 Ethernet (IEEE 802.3 compliant)

Security Features
Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 allow you to set two different types of passwords to limit
access to these systems.
v General-access password - set only from the service processor menus. It provides
limited access to the service processor menus and is usually available to all users
who are allowed to power on the system.
v Privileged-access password - Set from the service processor menus or from System
Management Services (SMS) utilities. Used by the system administrator or root user
and allows access to all service processor functions.

2 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Front View

Model 6C4

1 Operator Panel 4 Media Bay

2 Front Serial Connector 5 Hot-Plug Disk Drives
3 IDE CD-ROM Drive

Chapter 1. Introducing the System 3

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Model 6E4

1 Operator Panel 4 Media Bay

2 Front Serial Connector 5 Hot-Plug Disk Drives
3 IDE CD-ROM Drive

4 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Rear View

Model 6C4

1 4 PCI slots 64-Bit 10 Ethernet Connector 2

2 Redundant Power Cable Receptacle 11 RIO-G1 Connector
3 Primary Power Cable Receptacle 12 RIO-G0 Connector
4 System Power 13 Serial Connector 2
Control Network Connector
SPCN2
5 System Power 14 Serial Connector 3
Control Network Connector
SPCN1
6 Parallel Connector 15 Serial Connector 1
7 Hardware Management 16 Mouse Connector
Console Connector
HMC2
8 Hardware Management 17 Keyboard Connector
Console Connector
HMC1
9 Ethernet Connector 1 18 Rack Indicator
19 External SCSI Connector

Chapter 1. Introducing the System 5

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Model 6E4

1 4 PCI slots 64-Bit 10 Ethernet Connector 2

2 Redundant Power Cable Receptacle 11 RIO-G1 Connector
3 Primary Power Cable Receptacle 12 RIO-G0 Connector
4 System Power 13 Serial Connector 2
Control Network Connector
SPCN2
5 System Power 14 Serial Connector 3
Control Network Connector
SPCN1
6 Parallel Connector 15 Serial Connector 1
7 Hardware Management 16 Mouse Connector
Console Connector
HMC2
8 Hardware Management 17 Keyboard Connector
Console Connector
HMC1
9 Ethernet Connector 1 18 Rack Indicator
19 External SCSI Connector

6 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Operator Panel

1 Power-On Switch 6 Operator Panel Display

2 Power LED 7 (FS1) Front Serial
Connector (RJ48 Connector)
3 Attention LED 8 CSP Reset Switch (Pinhole)
4 SCSI Port Activity 9 System Reset Button
5 Ethernet Port Activity

Chapter 1. Introducing the System 7

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

8 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Chapter 2. Using the System

This chapter provides information on how to start and use the system.

Starting the System Unit

1. Set the power switches of the attached devices to On.

Note: When the system is plugged in but not powered on, the Power-On LED
flashes slowly.
2. If the LED is not flashing and OK is not displayed, ensure that the power cord,
located at the back of the system unit, is plugged into a grounded electrical outlet.
3. If this does not solve the problem, go to Chapter 8, “Hardware Problem
Determination” on page 155.
4. Press the Power-On switch.
When you press the Power-On switch, the Power-On LED comes on, and the
system starts a POST (power-on self-test).
During POST, progress codes display in the operator panel display.
5. If the Power-On LED does not come on and there is no indication of power when
you press the Power-On switch, go to Chapter 8, “Hardware Problem Determination”
on page 155.

Stopping the System Unit

Attention: When you use the shutdown procedure for your system, follow the correct
shutdown procedure before you stop the system. Failure to do so can result
in the loss of data. The system is powered down by the shutdown
procedure.
1. At a command line, type shutdown to stop the operating system.
2. After you shut down the operating system, set the power switches of any attached
devices to Off.
3. If you will be servicing the system, unplug the system-unit power cable from the
electrical outlet.

Reading the Operator Panel Display

The operator panel display is used to:
v Track the progress of the system unit self-tests and configuration program
v Display codes when the operating system comes to an abnormal end
v Display system messages

9
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Operator Panel

1 Power-On Switch 6 Operator Panel Display

2 Power LED 7 (FS1) Front Serial
Connector (RJ48 Connector)
3 Attention LED 8 CSP Reset Switch (Pinhole)
4 SCSI Port Activity 9 System Reset Button
5 Ethernet Port Activity

Number Component Name Component Description

1 Power-On Button Turns the system power on and off.
2 Power LED Normal State - LED is on when system is
connected to a power source.
3 Attention LED Normal State - LED is off.
4 SCSI Port Activity Normal State - LED is on when there is SCSI
activity.
5 Ethernet Port Activity Normal State - LED is on when there is Ethernet
activity.
6 Operator Panel Display Displays current status of system startup, or
diagnostic information in the event of a hardware
problem.
7 Front Serial Connector Serial port uses RJ48 connector. Use to plug in
(FS1) external devices at the front of the system unit.
8 CSP Reset Switch Service Personnel Use
9 System Reset Button Resets the system

Component LEDs

Component LEDs
Individual LEDs are located on or near the failing components. The LEDs are located
either on the component itself or on the carrier of the component (for example: memory
card, fan, memory module, CPU). LEDs are either green or amber.

Green colored LEDs when blinking indicates that the system or system component is in
the standby state (waiting to receive or send information). A steady lit green colored
LED indicates that the system or component is operating normally.

10 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Amber colored LEDs indicate a fault or identify condition. If your system or one of the
components on your system has a lit amber colored LED identify the problem and take
the appropriate action to restore the system to normal.

Component LED Location LED Color OFF ON

Function
Power and Packaging LEDs
Drawer Sum Amber (1x) Normal Fault
Rack Indicator Top of Rack
AC Input Green (1x) No Input AC Good
Operator Panel Amber (2x) Normal Fault
Attention
+ Rear
No AC System On
System Unit If blinking =
Operator Panel
Power Green (2x) v Standby - slow
+ Rear
v transition of power on/off -
fast
Fans Identif Fan Top Amber (4x) Normal Fault
Power Supply Green (1x) No Input Input Good
Input Source
Front + Top
Fault Power Supply Amber (1x) Normal Fault
Front + Top
Power Supply (AC) If blinking = Power Control
Comm. Failed

DC Output Power Supply DC Off DC Good

Green (1x)
Good Front + Top If blinking = Standby
Activity DASD Board Green (4x) No Activity Activity
Disk Drives
(DASD) Remove DASD Board Amber (4x) Meets RPA Hot Swap
Identify Requirement
Optional Media No LED

Chapter 2. Using the System 11

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Component LED Location LED Color OFF ON

Function
Electronics Component LEDs
PCI Riser Card Green (4x) PCI Hot-Plug Standard
Power
(board socket)
PCI Adapters
PCI Riser Card Amber (4x) PCI Hot-Plug Standard
Attention
(board socket)
Memory DIMMs Identify Processor Amber (8x) Normal Fault
Board (Top)
CEC Backplane Identify CEC Backplane Amber (1x) Normal Fault
Processor Board Identify Processor Amber (1x) Normal Fault
Housing (Top)
PCI Riser Card Identify PCI Riser Card Amber (1x) Normal Fault
Disk Drive No LED
Backplane

Component LED Location LED Color OFF ON

Function
Port LED Indicators
SCSI Port Activity Operator Panel Green (1x) No Activity Activity
RIO Port Normal Fault
Identify CEC Backplane Amber (2x)
If blinking = Identify
CEC Backplane Green(2x) 10Mbit Mode 100Mbit
Mode
Ethernet Port Mode
Ethernet0,
Activity CEC Backplane Green (2x) No Activity Activity
Ethernet1
Activity Operator Panel Green (1x) No Activity Activity

Reporting the Problem

After you have determined which component is failing, report the problem.
1. Record the following information before calling for serice:
v Machine type and model number
v Server serial number
v Any error codes that appear in the operator panel display or console
v The adapter, or device containing the lit amber-colored LED
2. Call for service. You will be given the choice to replace the failing component
yourself or have a service representative replace it for you. If you decide to replace
the failing component, go to “Repair Action” for instructions.

Repair Action
After you have determined which component is failing, a repair action is necessary.
1. Run the system verification procedure. Refer to for instructions on component
installation, removal and replacement.

12 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

2. Record the following information before calling for service:

v Machine type and model
v Server serial number
v Any error codes that appear in the operator panel display or console
v Any LEDs that are lit on the indicator panel
3. Call for service.
4. After the repair action is completed, go to “Resetting the LEDs”, and reset the
LEDs.

Resetting the LEDs

After the repair action is completed, do the following:
1. Log in as root user.
2. At the command line, type diag.
3. Select Task Selection.
4. Select Log Repair Action.
5. Select the device that was repaired.
6. Press F10 to exit diagnostics.

If the Attention LED remains on after you have completed the repair action and reset
the LEDs, call for service.

Chapter 2. Using the System 13

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Using the Keyboards

There are several keyboards available for the system. The keyboards have various
keys that enter data and control the cursor location. The keyboards can be engraved for
the languages of various countries.

The functions of each keyboard depend on the software used. The character sets for
the keyboards are contained and explained in the documentation for your operating
system.

Function Keys

Print
Num Caps Scroll
Scroll
Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12
Screen
Pause Lock Lock Lock
Lock

SysRq Break

! @ # $ % & * ( ) _ + Page Num

Backspace Insert Home Up / * -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = Lock

Q W E R T Y U I O P Page 7 8 9
Tab Delete End Down Home Pg Up

Caps A S D F G H J K L : " 4 5 6
Lock ; , Enter

Z X C V B N M < > ? 1 2 3
Shift Shift
, . / End Pg Dn

Enter

Ctrl Alt Alt Ctrl

0 .
Ins Del

Control Numeric
Typewriter Keys Keypad
Keys

The keyboard is divided into four sections:

v Function keys are multipurpose keys and their function is controlled by the operating
system.
v Typewriter keys are similar to a standard typewriter. Their function is controlled by
the software.
v Control keys move the cursor on the screen and do programmed control functions.
The movement and functions depend upon the application used.
v Numeric keypad is arranged like a calculator to help when typing numbers.

On all of the keyboards, you can adjust the tilt position for typing comfort. To tilt the
keyboard, pull out on the keyboard legs. The legs snap into position. To decrease the
tilt of the keyboard, rotate the keyboard legs until they snap into the bottom of the
keyboard case.

The keyboard cable plugs into the keyboard connector at the rear of the system.

14 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Using the Three-Button Mouse

The mouse is a hand-operated locating device. A three-button mouse is available for
use with the system. Consult your application publication for the exact use of the
three-button mouse.

You can use the mouse to perform such functions as positioning a cursor, selecting
items from a menu, or moving around in your document much easier and faster than if
you used only the keyboard. The cursor moves exactly as you move the mouse on a
flat surface, such as a desktop.

With the mouse buttons, you can perform functions such as selecting and deselecting
options, extending your selection, or choosing a command. The precise function of your
mouse depends on the software you are using.

The mouse cable plugs into the mouse connector at the rear of the system.

Handling the Mouse Correctly

For best operation, handle the mouse with care. Incorrect handling can damage the
mouse.

Do not:
v Operate the mouse on cloth, unfinished wood, newspaper, or carpet.
v Drop or hit the mouse.
v Carry the mouse by holding onto the cable.
v Expose the mouse to extreme temperatures or direct sunlight.
v Place the mouse in liquid spills.

Caring for the Mouse

The operating surface for the mouse should be smooth, clean, and flat. For example,
you can operate the mouse on the following surfaces:
v Finished wood
v Glass
v Enamel
v Plastic
v Paper (except newspaper)
v Metal

Chapter 2. Using the System 15

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Rough surfaces collect contaminants that can be transferred to the interior of the mouse
by the ball. Rough surfaces can also cause the pads located on the bottom of the
mouse to prematurely wear. A deeply pitted surface could cause erratic operation of the
mouse. The surface you use should be free from spills, dirt, dust, lint, wax, eraser dust,
and other foreign matter.

To care for the mouse:

v Inspect the work surface for spills or other contaminants.
v Dust the work surface.
v If you are using a paper pad, inspect it for wear and replace it if necessary.

Cleaning the Mouse

Use the following steps to clean the mouse:
1. Remove the retaining ring by turning it counterclockwise, in the direction of the
arrow, as shown in the illustration.

Retaining Ring

Ball

Cavity

2. Remove the ball.

3. Inspect the ball for contaminants. Wipe it clean with a dry, lint-free cloth.
4. If the ball is dirty, wash it in warm, soapy water. Rinse and wipe the ball with a
lint-free cloth until dry.
5. Inspect the ball cavity in the mouse for foreign materials. If there are any foreign
materials, remove them.
6. Replace the ball.
7. Replace the retaining ring on the mouse and align it with the open slots in the ball
cavity.
8. Turn the retaining ring clockwise until the open slots are covered and you hear the
ring snap into place.

16 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Using the 3.5-Inch Diskette Drive

A 1.44 MB diskette drive is an optional feature for this system. Contact your sales
representative before purchasing a diskette drive for this system.

The 1.44 MB diskette drive can format, read, and write diskettes compatible with the
following diskette drives:
v 1.0 MB diskettes with 720 KB formatted data capacity
v 2.0 MB diskettes with 1.44 MB formatted data capacity (High Density)

Format the diskette according to its specified capacity.

Write-Protecting 3.5-Inch Diskettes

Write-protecting diskettes is necessary so that important information is not accidentally
lost. When diskettes are write-protected, you can read information from the diskettes,
but you cannot write information to them.

There is a write-protect tab on the 3.5-inch diskette. To locate the write-protect tab, turn
the diskette over with the label facing down.

To prevent writing onto a diskette, slide the write-protect tab to open the protect slot, as
shown in the illustration.

(Slot Open)

Write-Protect Tab

To allow writing onto a diskette, slide the write-protect tab to cover the protect slot, as
shown in the illustration.

(Slot Closed)

Write-Protect Tab

Chapter 2. Using the System 17

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

18 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Loading and Unloading the 3.5-Inch Diskette

To load a diskette into the drive, insert the diskette in the diskette drive with the labeled
metal shutter first. Push the diskette into the drive until you hear a click. The click
indicates that the diskette is securely in position in the drive.

To unload the diskette, push the diskette-unload button. The diskette unloads partially
from the drive. Remove the diskette.

Using the CD-ROM Drive

CAUTION:
A class 1 laser is contained in the device. Do not attempt to operate the drive
while it is disassembled. Do not attempt to open the covers of the drive as it is
not serviceable and is replaced as a unit.

This section describes the features of the 40X SCSI-2 CD-ROM drive and provides
instructions for handling the drive and CD-ROM discs. The CD-ROM is a half-high,
5.25", 8-bit, single-ended, tray-loading drive. Its features include the following:
v SCSI-2 interface supports both synchronous and asynchronous data transfer
v High-speed data transfer rate of 2100 KB per second (14X) at inner diameter and
4800 KB per second (32X) at outer diameter due to constant RPM spin rate
v High-speed synchronous burst rate of 10 MB per second
v Average random access time of 90 ms
v Loading tray accommodates both 8 cm discs (in the horizontal orientation only) and
12 cm discs
v Reads multi-session discs
v Reads CD-recordable discs
v Reads CD-RW discs
v Supports all major CD-ROM formats: Mode 1, Mode 2, XA, CDDA, and audio
v Headphone output and line output for audio

Chapter 2. Using the System 19

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Front View of CD-ROM Drive

1 2

6 5 4 3

1 Compact Disc Tray

2 Emergency Eject Hole
3 Load/Unload Button
4 Status Light
5 Volume Control
6 Headphone Jack

Understanding the Status Lights

The status lights indicate the operational status of the drive. The various conditions are
as follows:

If light is: Condition is:

Off Drive is in standby mode with or without a disc loaded.
Blinking (green) Any of the following:
v Drive tray is inserted. The light blinks while the drive
completes the initialization checkout.
v Drive is reading data. The light blinks while data is being
read.
v Drive is in Play Audio Mode. The light blinks while the audio
is playing.
On (amber) Hardware error condition found during initialization.
Note: If this occurs, contact your service representative.

20 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Handling Compact Discs

Compact discs are high-density media that must be handled with care and kept clean to
ensure that they remain readable. Use the following precautions to ensure reliability:
v Hold the compact disc by the edges. Do not touch the surface of the compact disc.
v To remove dust or fingerprints, wipe the compact disc from the center to the outside
of the compact disc as shown, using a lint-free cloth.

Attention: Wiping the compact disc in a circular direction can cause loss of data.
v Do not write on the surface.
v Do not store or place the compact disc in direct sunlight.
v Do not use benzene, thinners, or other cleaners to clean the compact disc.
v Do not bend the compact disc.

Other Handling Considerations

Be sure to take the following additional precautions when you use the CD-ROM drive:
v Remove compact discs from the tray before you move the drive anywhere.
v Do not place the drive where any of the following conditions exist:
– High temperature
– High humidity
– Excessive dust
– Excessive vibration or sudden shock
– Inclined surface
– Direct sunlight
v Do not insert foreign objects into the drive.
v Do not remove the drive covers or attempt to service the drive yourself.

Chapter 2. Using the System 21

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Loading a Compact Disc

To load a compact disc into the drive, do the following:
1. Press the Load/Unload button to open the tray. The tray slides out of the drive.
2. Place the compact disc in the tray with the label facing up.
3. Press the Load/Unload button, or gently push in the tray, to close the tray.

Note: Be sure that none of the vertical retaining tabs are extended when you use the
drive in the horizontal position.

Opening the Tray Manually

The compact disc tray automatically opens when you press the Load/Unload button. If it
does not automatically open, follow these steps to force it open manually:
1. Shut down and turn off the power to your system.
2. Insert the straightened end of a paper clip into the emergency eject hole until you
feel some resistance. See “Front View of CD-ROM Drive” on page 20 if you are not
sure where the emergency eject hole is located.
3. Continue to push in the paper clip while you pull out the tray with your fingernail.
4. Pull the tray completely open and remove the disc. It is normal for the tray to make
a clicking sound while you are pulling it open.

Playing an Audio CD
To play an audio CD, you must have headphones connected to the headphone jack
located on the front of the drive, or connected to the line-out connector located on the
back of the system. You must also have an audio software application installed.

The headphone jack provides the connection for headphones using a 3.5-mm (1/8")
stereo mini-plug. The volume control adjusts the audio output level for the headphones.

22 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Using the Service Processor and Service Director Features

The service processor and service director features protect users against unnecessary
system downtime by keeping support personnel (both internal and external) aware of
any unexpected changes in the system environment. In combination, the two features
provide a flexible solution to automated system maintenance.

Service Processor
The service processor runs on its own power boundary and continually monitors
hardware attributes, the AIX operating system, and the environmental conditions within
the system. Any system failure which prevents the system from returning to an
operational state (a fully functional AIX operating system) is reported by the service
processor. The service processor is controlled by firmware and does not require the AIX
operating system to be operational to perform its tasks. If any system failures are
detected, the service processor has the ability to take predetermined corrective actions.
The methods of corrective actions are:
v Surveillance
v Call Home
v AIX operating system monitoring

Surveillance is a function in which the service processor monitors the system through
heartbeat communication with the system firmware. The heartbeat is a periodic signal
that the firmware can monitor. During system startup, the firmware surveillance monitor
is automatically enabled to check for heartbeats from the firmware. If a heartbeat is not
detected within a default period, the service processor cycles the system power and
attempts to restart until the system either restarts successfully, or a predetermined retry
threshold is reached. In the event the service processor is unsuccessful in bringing the
system online (or in the event that the user asked to be alerted to any service
processor-assisted restarts), the system can call home to report the error.

The call home function can be initialized to call either a service center telephone
number, a customer administration center, or a digital pager telephone number. The
service processor can be configured to stop at the first successful call to any of the
numbers listed, or can be configured to call every number provided. If connected to the
service center, the service processor transmits the relevant system information (the
system’s serial number and model type) and service request number (SRN). If
connected to a digital pager service, the service processor inputs a customer voice
telephone number defined by the customer. An established sequence of digits or the
telephone number to a phone near the failed system could be used to signal a system
administrator to a potential system failure.

During normal operations, the service processor can also be configured to monitor the
AIX operating system. If AIX does not respond to the service processor heartbeat, the
service processor assumes the operating system is hung. The service processor can
automatically initiate a restart and, if enabled, initiate the call home function to alert the
appropriate parties to the system hang. Enabling operating system surveillance also
affords AIX the means to detect any service processor failures and report those failures
to the service director application.

Chapter 2. Using the System 23

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Unlike the service director, the service processor cannot be configured in a client/server
environment where one system can be used to manage all dial-out functionally for a set
of systems.

Prior to installing the service director feature, ensure that you have the latest levels of
service processor microcode and system firmware. You also need a properly configured
modem. For more information on configuring a modem, see “Call-In/Call-Out Setup
Menu” on page 50.

Service Director
The Service Director is a software extension to the AIX operating system that monitors
the system while the AIX operating system is running. The Service Director monitors
and analyzes all recoverable system failures, and, if needed, can automatically place a
service call to a service center (without user intervention).

The service center receives the machine type/serial number, host name, SRN, and a
problem description. The service center analyzes the problem report and, if warranted,
dispatches a service person to the customer site. The service center also determines if
any hardware components need to be ordered prior to the service person’s arrival.

The Service Director code also gives the user the option to establish a single system as
the problem reporting server. A single system, accessible over the user network, can be
used as the central server for all the other systems on the local area network (LAN) that
are running the Service Director application. If the Service Director application on a
remote client decides a service request needs to be placed, the client forwards the
information to the Service Director server, which dials the service center telephone
number from its locally attached modem. In this scenario, the user only needs to
maintain a single analog line for providing call-out capabilities for a large set of servers.

When used in a scalable parallel (SP) environment, a client/server type implementation

is configured. The Service Director client code runs on each of the scalable parallel
(SP) nodes. The server component runs on the control workstation. In the event of any
system failures, the relevant information is transmitted to the control workstation through
the integrated Ethernet. After it has been alerted to the system failure, the control
workstation initiates actions to prepare and send the service request.

A modem is required for enabling automated problem reporting to the service center.
Configuration files for several types of modems are included as part of the Service
Director package. Refer to “Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu” on page 50 for more
information on configuring your modem.

24 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor

Note: The information in this chapter regarding the configuring of serial ports, and
modems attached to those serial ports, applies only to the serial ports (S1 and
S2) on the CEC backplane (location U0.1-P1). None of this information is
applicable to the serial ports, or modems attached to those serial ports, on
the(HMC).

The service processor runs on its own power boundary and continually monitors
hardware attributes and the environmental conditions within the system. The service
processor is controlled by firmware and does not require the AIX operating system to be
operational to perform its tasks.

The service processor menus allow you to configure service processor options, as well
as enable and disable functions.

Service processor menus are available using an ASCI terminal or a HMC virtual
terminal window when OK is displayed on the operator panel or when the service
processor has detected a server problem (such as a surveillance failure).

Service Processor Menus

The service processor menus are divided into the following groups:
v General user menu - the user must know the general-access password.
v Privileged user menus - the user must know the privileged-access password.

If the server is powered off, the service processor menus can be accessed locally or
remotely on the following:
v Serial port 1 (S1)
v Serial port 2 (S2)
v The HMC

25
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Accessing the Service Processor Menus Locally

Service processor menus can be accessed by opening a virtual terminal window on the
HMC, or by attaching an ASCII terminal to serial port 1 (S1) or serial port 2 (S2). After
OK displays in the operator panel, press any key on the keyboard to signal the service
processor.

Note: The service processor menus cannot be accessed simultaneously on a virtual

terminal window on the HMC and on an ASCII terminal. Accessing the menus on
the HMC locks out access to the ASCII terminals and vice versa.

When you gain access, the service processor prompts you for a password (if one is
set), and when verified, displays the service processor menus.

The service processor menu prompt, represented by 0> or 1>, indicates the serial port
to which the terminal is connected.
v An ASCII terminal can have the following prompts:
– 0> indicates serial port 1 (S1)
– 1> indicates serial port 2 (S2)
v The HMC always indicates 0>

Accessing the Service Processor Menus Remotely

If your system has a modem connected to serial port 1 or serial port 2 and is configured
for call-in (see “Modem Configuration Menu” on page 51), the service processor menus
can be accessed remotely as follows:
1. With the system powered off, call in from a remote terminal.
2. The service processor detects ring-indicate and prompts you for a password (if one
is set). When verified, the service processor menus display remotely.

Saving and Restoring Service Processor Settings

All the settings that you make (except language) from the service processor menus can
be backed up either for recovering from a fault that may corrupt these settings, or for
replicating these settings to other servers that include a service processor.

The service aid, Save or Restore Hardware Management Policies, can be used to save
your settings after initial setup or whenever the settings must be changed for system
operation purposes.

It is strongly recommended that you use this service aid for backing up service
processor settings to protect the usefulness of the service processor and the availability
of the server. Refer to “Save or Restore Hardware Management Policies,” in
“Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids” for information about this service aid.

Menu Inactivity
The service processor exits menu mode after ten minutes of inactivity and displays a
message indicating that it has done so. Pressing any key on the virtual terminal window
causes the main menu to display.

26 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

General User Menu

The menu options presented to the general user are a subset of the options available to
the privileged user. The user must know the general-access password, if one is set, to
access this menu.

GENERAL USER MENU

1. Power-on System

2. Power-off System

3. Read VPD Image from Last System Boot

4. Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot

5. Read Service Processor Error Logs

6. Read System POST Errors

99. Exit from Menus

0>

v Power-on System
Allows the user to start the system using the current virtual terminal window as the
active console.
v Power-off System
This option is not available on this system.
v Read VPD Image from Last System Boot
Displays manufacturer vital product data, such as serial numbers, part numbers, and
so on, that were stored from the system boot prior to the one in progress now, for the
entire system.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 27

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot

Displays a number of the boot progress indicators, which may include service
processor checkpoints, IPL checkpoints, or AIX configuration codes, from the
previous system boot. This information can be useful in diagnosing system faults.

Note: If you are running one or more logical partitions, enter the partition ID (0-15)
to display progress indicators for that partition since the last system boot. If
your system is running in Full System Partition mode, this option automatically
displays details from partition zero.

The progress indicator codes are listed from top (latest) to bottom (oldest).

This information is not stored in nonvolatile storage. If the system is powered off
using the power-on button on the operator panel, this information is retained. If the
ac power is disconnected from the system, this information will be lost. For an
example, refer to “LCD Progress Indicator Log” on page 72.
v Read Service Processor Error Logs
Displays the service processor error logs. For an example, refer to “Service
Processor Error Logs” on page 71.
v Read System POST Errors
Displays additional error log information (this option is only for service personnel).
v Exit from Menus
Selecting this option will exit the service processor menus. You can re-enter the
menus by pressing any key on the console.

28 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Privileged User Menus

The following menus are available to privileged users only. The user must know the
privileged-access password, if one is set, to access these menus.

Main Menu
A listing at the top of the main menu contains the following:
v Your system’s current firmware version
v The firmware copyright notice
v The system name given to your server during setup

You need the firmware version for reference when you either update or repair the
functions of your service processor.

The system name, an optional field, is the name that your server reports in problem
messages. This name helps your support team (for example, your system administrator,
network administrator, or service representative) to more quickly identify the location,
configuration, and history of your server. Set the system name, from the main menu,
using option 6.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 29

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Note: The information under the Service Processor Firmware heading in the following
Main Menu illustration is example information only.

Service Processor Firmware

VERSION: RH011007
Copyright 2001 IBM Corporation
SYSTEM NAME

MAIN MENU

1. Service Processor Setup Menu

2. System Power Control Menu

3. System Information Menu

4. Language Selection Menu

5. Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu

6. Set System Name

99. Exit from Menus

0>

v Service Processor Setup Menu

See “Service Processor Setup Menu” on page 31 for more information.
v System Power Control Menu
See “System Power Control Menu” on page 38 for more information.
v System Information Menu
See “System Information Menu” on page 43 for more information.
v Language Selection Menu
See “Language Selection Menu” on page 49 for more information.
v Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu
See “Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu” on page 50 for more information.
v Set System Name
Allows setting of the system name.

30 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Service Processor Setup Menu

The following Service Processor Setup Menu is accessed from the Main Menu:
SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP MENU

1. Change Privileged Access Password

2. Change General Access Password

3. Enable/Disable Console Mirroring:

Currently Enabled

4. Start Talk Mode

5. OS Surveillance Setup Menu

6. Reset Service Processor

7. Reprogram Flash EPROM Menu

8. Serial Port Snoop Setup Menu

9. Scan Log Dump Setup Menu:

Currently As Needed

98. Return to Previous Menu

99. Exit from Menus

0>

Note: Unless otherwise stated in menu responses, settings become effective when a
menu is exited using option 98 or 99.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 31

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Passwords
Passwords can be any combination of up to eight alphanumeric characters. You can
enter longer passwords, but the entries are truncated to include only the first eight
characters. The privileged access password can be set from service processor menus
or from System Management Services (SMS) utilities (see Chapter 4, “Using System
Management Services” on page 77). The general access password can be set only
from service processor menus.

For security purposes, the service processor counts the number of attempts to enter
passwords. The results of not recognizing a password within this error threshold are
different, depending on whether the attempts are being made locally (at the server) or
remotely (through a modem). The error threshold is three attempts.

If the error threshold is reached by someone entering passwords at the server, the
service processor commands the server to resume the initial program load (IPL). This
action is taken based on the assumption that the server is in an adequately secure
location with only authorized users having access. Such users must still successfully
enter a login password to access AIX.

If the error threshold is reached by someone entering passwords remotely, the service
processor commands the server to power off to prevent potential security attacks on the
server by unauthorized remote users. The following table lists what you can access with
the privileged-access password and the general-access password.

Privileged General Resulting Menu

Access Access
Password Password
None None Service processor MAIN MENU displays.
Set None Users with the password see the service processor
MAIN MENU. Users without password cannot log in.
Set Set Users see menus associated with the entered
password.

32 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v Change Privileged-Access Password

Set or change the privileged-access password. It provides the user with the capability
to access all service processor functions. This password is usually used by the
system administrator or root user.
v Change General-Access Password
Set or change the general-access password. It provides limited access to service
processor menus, and is usually available to all users who are allowed to power on
the server, especially remotely.

Note: The general-access password can only be set or changed after the privileged
access password is set.
v Enable/Disable Console Mirroring
Console mirroring is supported on serial port 1 (S1) and serial port 2 (S2). When
console mirroring is enabled, the service processor sends information to all serial
ports. The serial port from which console mirroring is enabled is referred to as the
active port. The mirror port is determined when keyboard input is detected from one
of the other ports. From this point on, the service processor sends information only to
the active port and the mirror port. This capability can be enabled by local or remote
users, providing local users with the capability to monitor remote sessions. Console
mirroring can be enabled for the current session only. For more information, see
“Console Mirroring” on page 70.
v Start Talk Mode
In a console-mirroring session, it is useful for those who are monitoring the session
to be able to communicate with each other. Selecting Start Talk Mode activates the
keyboards and displays for such communications while console mirroring is
established. This is a full duplex link, so message interference is possible. Alternating
messages between users works best.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 33

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v OS Surveillance Setup Menu

This menu can be used to set up operating system (OS) surveillance.

OS Surveillance Setup Menu

1. Surveillance:
Currently Enabled

2. Surveillance Time Interval:

2 minutes

3. Surveillance Delay:
2 minutes

98. Return to Previous Menu

0>

– Surveillance
Can be set to Enabled or Disabled.

– Surveillance Time Interval

Can be set to any number from 2 through 255.

– Surveillance Delay
Can be set to any number from 0 through 255.
Refer to “Service Processor System Monitoring - Surveillance” on page 67 for more
information about surveillance.
v Reset Service Processor
If this option is selected, entering Y causes the service processor to reboot.
v Reprogram Flash EPROM Menu
This option updates the system EPROMs. After entering Y to indicate that you want
to continue, you are prompted to enter the update diskettes. Follow the instructions
on the screen. When the update is complete, the service processor reboots.
All system EPROMs that can be reprogrammed are updated at the same time and
are as follows:
– System power control network programming
– Service processor programming
– System firmware programming
– Run-Time Abstraction Services

34 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v Serial Port Snoop Setup Menu

This menu can be used to set up serial port snooping, in which the user can
configure serial port 1 as a ″catch-all″ reset device.
From the service processor main menu, select option 1, service processor setup
menu, then select option 8 (Serial Port Snoop Setup Menu).

SERIAL PORT SNOOP SETUP MENU

1. System reset string:

Currently Unassigned

2. Snoop Serial Port:

Currently Unassigned

98. Return to Previous Menu

1>

Use the Snoop Serial Port option to select the serial port to snoop.

Note: Only serial port 1 is supported.

Use the system reset string option to enter the system reset string, which resets the
machine when it is detected on the main console on Serial Port 1.

After serial port snooping is correctly configured, at any point after the system is
booted to AIX, whenever the reset string is typed on the main console, the system
uses the service processor reboot policy to restart.

Because pressing Enter after the reset string is not required, make sure that the
string is not common or trivial. A mixed-case string is recommended.
v Scan Log Dump Policy
A scan dump is the collection of chip data that the service processor gathers after a
system malfunction, such as a checkstop or hang. The scan dump data may contain
chip scan rings, chip trace arrays, and SCOM contents.
The scan dump data are stored in the system control store. The size of the scan
dump area is approximately 4 MB.
During the scan log dump, A8xx (in the range A810 to A8FF) displays in the operator
panel. The xx characters will change as the scan log dump progresses. If the xx
characters do not change after five minutes, the service processor is hung and must
be reset.
When the scan log dump is complete, depending on how the reboot policy is set, the
system will either:
– Go to the standby state (and the service processor menus will be available),
indicated by OK or STBY in the operator panel
OR
– Attempt to reboot.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 35

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Scan Log Dump Setup Menu

1. Scan Log Dump Policy:

Currently As Needed

2. Scan Log Dump Content:

Currently As Requested

3. Immediate Dump

98. Return to Previous Menu

0> 1
Select from the following options:
(As Needed=2, Always=3)

Enter New Option:

0>

The scan log dump policy can be set to the following:

2 = As Needed
The processor run-time diagnostics record the dump data based on the
error type. This is the default value.
3 = Always
Selecting this option allows the service processor to record a scan log dump
for all error types.

The scan log dump policy can also be set from the Tasks menu in the AIX service
aids.

Option 2 displays the following screen:

Scan Log Dump Setup Menu

1. Scan Log Dump Policy:

Currently As Needed

2. Scan Log Dump Content:

Currently As Requested

3. Immediate Dump

98. Return to Previous Menu

0> 2
Select from the following options:
(As Requested=1, Optimum=2, Complete=3, Minimum=4)

Enter New Option:

0>

The scan log dump content can be set to the following:

36 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

1 = As Requested
The processor run-time diagnostics will select the contents of the dump file
based on the type of error that occurs. This is the default.
2 = Optimum
The dump will include the smallest amount of information to diagnose a
hardware error.
3 = Complete
The dump will include as much information as possible to allow the complete
analysis of hardware and software errors.
4 = Minimum
The dump will include the smallest amount of information possible (a minimum
number of hardware scan log rings).

The complete dump will take the longest time to finish; it may take as long as 1.5 hours
on a fully configured system.

Option 3, ″Immediate Dump″, can only be used when the system is in the standby state
with power on. It is used to dump the system data after a checkstop or machine check
occurs when the system firmware is running, or when the operating system is booting
or running.

The scan log dump content can also be set from the Tasks menu in the AIX diagnostic
service aids.

If a valid dump file already exists, the dump control code will stop because the contents
of the prior dump must be protected.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 37

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

System Power Control Menu

This menu is used to set power control options. Other menus that control boot options
are available from this menu.

SYSTEM POWER CONTROL MENU

1. Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode:

Currently Enabled

2. Ring Indicate Power-On Menu

3. Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu

4. Power-On System

5. Power-Off System

6. Enable/Disable Fast System Boot

Currently Fast Boot

7. Boot Mode Menu

98. Return to Previous Menu

99. Exit from Menus

0>

v Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode

Use this option to instruct the service processor to restore the power state of the
server after a temporary power failure. Unattended start mode can also be set
through the System Management Services (SMS) menus. This option is intended to
be used on servers that require automatic power-on after a power failure. For more
information, see “System Power-On Methods” on page 58.

38 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v Ring Indicate Power-On Menu

RING INDICATE POWER-ON MENU

1. Ring indicate power-on :

Currently Enabled

2. Number of rings:
Currently 3

30. Refresh Modem Settings

98. Return to Previous Menu

Ring indicate power-on is enabled by default on both serial port 1 (S1) and serial port
2 (S2). When ring indicate power-on is enabled, call-in is disabled.

If ring indicate power-on is enabled and call-in is already enabled, you will be asked
to confirm your choice. Refer to the message displayed on your screen.

If the ring indicate power-on setting is changed, you must select option 30, Refresh
Modem Settings to update the modem settings. If Refresh Modem Settings is
selected, and the modem(s) have not been configured, you will be asked to configure
the modems first. See “Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu” on page 50 for information on
configuring modems.

Option 2 is used to set the number of rings.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 39

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu

The following menu controls the Reboot/Restart Policy:
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu

1. Number of reboot attempts:

Currently 1

2. Use OS-Defined restart policy?

Currently No

3. Enable supplemental restart policy?

Currently Yes

4. Call-Out before restart:

Currently Disabled

98. Return to Previous Menu

0>

Reboot is the process of bringing up the system hardware; for example, from a
system reset or power on. Restart is activating the operating system after the system
hardware is reinitialized. Restart must follow a successful reboot.
– Number of reboot attempts - If the server fails to successfully complete the boot
process, it attempts to reboot the number of times specified. Entry values equal to
or greater than 0 are valid. Only successive failed reboot/restart attempts are
counted.
– Use OS-Defined restart policy - Allows the service processor whether to react in
the same way that the operating system does to major system faults by reading
the setting of the operating system parameter Automatically Restart/Reboot
After a System Crash. This parameter might already defined, depending on the
operating system or its version/level. If the operating system automatic restart
setting is defined, it can be set to respond to a major fault by restarting or by not
restarting. See your operating system documentation for details on setting up
operating system automatic restarts. The default value is NO.

40 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

– Enable supplemental restart policy - The default setting is YES. When set to
YES, the service processor restarts the system when the system loses control as
detected by service processor surveillance, and either:
The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to NO.
OR
The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to YES, and the operating system
has no automatic restart policy.
– Call-Out before restart (Enabled/Disabled) - If a restart is necessary due to a
system fault, and you are running a full system partition, you can enable the
service processor to call out and report the event. This option can be valuable if
the number of these events becomes excessive, which might signal a bigger
problem.
v Power-On System
Allows immediate power-on of the system.
v Power-Off System
This option is not available on this system.
v Enable/Disable Fast System Boot
Allows the user to select the IPL type, mode, and speed of the system boot.
Attention: Selecting the fast IPL results in several diagnostic tests being skipped
and a shorter memory test being run.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 41

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v Boot Mode Menu

The Boot Mode Menu allows you to select a boot mode.

Boot Mode Menu

1. Boot to SMS Menu:

Currently Disabled

2. Service Mode Boot from Saved List:

Currently Disabled

3. Service Mode Boot from Default List:

Currently Disabled

4. Boot to Open Firmware Prompt:

Currently Disabled

98. Return to Previous Menu

0>

To select a boot mode, select a number and press Enter. The item corresponding to
the selected number toggles between Disabled to Enabled. If a boot mode is
Enabled, the boot mode selected is performed, and the Disabled/Enabled selection is
reset to Disabled. The following describes each boot mode:
– Boot to SMS Menu
When this selection is enabled, the system boots to the System Management
Services (SMS) Menu.
– Service Mode Boot from Saved List
This selection causes the system to perform a service mode boot using the
service mode boot list saved in NVRAM. If the system boots AIX from the disk
drive and AIX diagnostics are loaded on the disk drive, AIX boots to the
diagnostics menu.
Using this option to boot the system is the preferred way to run online diagnostics.
– Service Mode Boot from Default List
This selection is similar to Service Mode Boot from Saved List, except the system
boots using the default boot list that is stored in the system firmware. This is
normally used to try to boot customer diagnostics from the CD-ROM drive.
Using this option to boot the system is the preferred way to run standalone
diagnostics.
– Boot to Open Firmware
This option should only be used by service personnel to obtain additional debug
information. When this selection is enabled, the system boots to the open
firmware prompt.

42 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

System Information Menu

This menu provides access to system configuration information, error logs, system
resources, and processor configuration.

SYSTEM INFORMATION MENU

1. Read VPD Image from Last System Boot

2. Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot

3. Read Service Processor Error Logs

4. Read System POST Errors

5. Read NVRAM

6. Read Service Processor Configuration

7. Processor Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu

8. Memory Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu

9. Power Control Network Utilities Menu

10. LED Control Menu

98. Return to Previous Menu

99. Exit from Menus

0>

v Read VPD Image from Last System Boot

Displays manufacturer’s vital product data (VPD), such as serial numbers, part
numbers, and so on, that was stored from the system boot prior to the one in
progress now. VPD from all devices in the system is displayed.
v Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot
Displays a number of the boot progress indicators, which may include Service
Processor checkpoints, IPL checkpoints, or AIX configuration codes, from the
previous system boot. This information can be useful in diagnosing system faults.
The progress indicator codes are listed from top (latest) to bottom (oldest).
This information is not stored in nonvolatile storage. If the system is powered off
using the power-on button on the operator panel, this information is retained. If the
ac power is disconnected from the system, this information will be lost. For an
example, refer to “LCD Progress Indicator Log” on page 72.
v Read Service Processor Error Logs
Displays error conditions detected by the service processor. Refer to “Service
Processor Error Logs” on page 71 for an example of this error log.
v Read System POST Errors
This option should only be used by service personnel to obtain additional debug
information.
v Read NVRAM
Displays Non Volatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM) content.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 43

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v Read Service Processor Configuration

Displays current service processor configuration.
v Processor Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu
This menu allows the user to change the system processor configuration. If it is
necessary to take one of the processors offline, use this menu to deconfigure a
processor, and then reconfigure the processor at a later time. An example of this
menu follows:

PROCESSOR CONFIGURATION/DECONFIGURATION MENU

77. Enable/Disable CPU Repeat Gard: Currently Enabled

1. 0 3.0 (00) Configured by system 2. 1 3.1 (00) Deconfigured by system

3. 24 4.0 (00) Configured by system 4. 25 4.1 (00) Configured by system

98. Return to Previous Menu

0>

Note: This table is built from vital product data collected during the last boot
sequence. The first time the system is powered on, or after the system’s
nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) has been erased, this table may be empty. The
table is rebuilt during the next boot into AIX.

The fields of the previous table represent the following:

Column 1
(1.) Menu selection index.
Column 2
(0) Logical processor device number assigned by AIX. You can display
these logical device numbers by issuing the following command on the AIX
command line:
lsdev -C | grep proc
Column 3
(3.0) Processor address list used by the service processor.
Column 4
(00) Error status of the processors.

The error status of each processor is indicated by AB, where B indicates the number
of errors and A indicates the type of error according to the following table:
1: Bring-up failure
2: Run-time non-recoverable failure
3: Run-time recoverable failure
4: Group integrity failure
5. Non-repeat-gardable error. The resource may be reconfigured on
the next boot.

44 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

A status of 00 indicates that the CPU has not had any errors logged against it by the
service processor.

To enable or disable CPU repeat gard, use menu option 77. CPU repeat gard is
enabled by default.

If CPU repeat gard is disabled, processors that are in the ″deconfigured by system″
state will be reconfigured. These reconfigured processors are then tested during the
boot process, and if they pass, they remain online. If they fail the boot testing, they
are deconfigured even though CPU repeat gard is disabled.

The failure history of each CPU is retained. If a processor with a history of failures is
brought back online by disabling repeat gard, it remains online if it passes testing
during the boot process. However, if repeat gard is enabled, the processor is taken
offline again because of its history of failures.

Note: The processor numbering scheme used by the service processor is different
from the numbering scheme used by AIX. Consult the AIX documentation
before configuring or deconfiguring a processor to ensure that the correct
processor is selected.

Note: The number of processors available to AIX can be determined by issuing the
following command on the AIX command line: bindprocessor -q
v Memory Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu
These menus allow the user to change the system memory configuration. If it is
necessary to take one of the memory DIMMs offline, this menu allows you to
deconfigure a DIMM, and then reconfigure the DIMM at a later time.
When this option is selected, a menu displays. The following is an example of this
menu:
MEMORY CONFIGURATION/DECONFIGURATION MENU

77. Enable/Disable Memory Repeat Gard: Currently Enabled

78. Runtime Recoverable Error Repeat Gard: Currently Disabled

1. Memory card

98. Return to Previous Menu

After you select the memory card option by entering 1, a menu displays, allowing the
selection of a memory book. The following is an example of this menu.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 45

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

MEMORY CONFIGURATION/DECONFIGURATION MENU

1. 3.16(00) Configured by system 2. 3.17(00) Configured by system

3. 3.18(00) Configured by system 4. 3.19(00) Configured by system
5. 4.24(00) Configured by system 6. 4.25(00) Configured by system
7. 4.26(00) Configured by system 2. 4.27(00) Configured by system

98. Return to Previous Menu

Note: This table is built from vital product data collected during the last boot
sequence. The first time the system is powered on, or after the system’s
nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) has been erased, this table may be empty. The
table is rebuilt during the next boot into AIX.

The fields in the previous table represent the following:

Column 1
1. Menu selection index/DIMM number
Column 2
xx.xx : DIMM address used by service processor
Column 3
(00) Error status

The error status of the each memory DIMM is indicated by AB, where B indicates the
number of errors and A indicates the type of error according to the following table:
1. Bring-up failure
2. Run-time non-recoverable failure
3. Run-time recoverable failure
4. Group integrity failure
5. Non-repeat-gardable error. The resource may be reconfigured on the next boot.

An error status of 00 (for example, 3.16(00)) indicates that the memory DIMM has
not had any errors logged against it by the service processor.

To change the memory configuration, select the number of the memory DIMM. The
memory DIMM state will change from configured to deconfigured or from
deconfigured to configured.

In the previous example menu, each line shows two DIMMs and indicates whether
they are configured.

To enable or disable Memory Repeat Gard, use menu option 77 of the Processor
Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu.

The failure history of each DIMM is retained. If a DIMM with a history of failures is
brought back online by disabling Repeat Gard, it remains online if it passes testing

46 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

during the boot process. However, if Repeat Gard is enabled, the DIMM is taken
offline again because of its history of failures.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 47

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v Power Control Network Utilities Menu

POWER CONTROL NETWORK UTILITIES MENU

1. Lamp Test for all Operator Panels

2. Display I/O Type

3. Change I/O Type

98. Return to Previous Menu

0>

– Lamp Test for All Operator Panels

Selecting this option tests the media drawer operator panel’s indicators by causing
them to blink on and off for approximately 30 seconds.
– Display I/O Type
This option is not available on this system.
– Change I/O Type
Use this option to change the I/O type of the primary I/O book after a service
action or configuration change if the I/O type is incorrect. If this option is chosen,
you will be asked to make the following entries:
1. For the I/O drawer address, type 1.
2. For the I/O type, type 98.

If either value is not valid, a failure message displays on the console. Press Enter
to return to the Power Control Network Utilities Menu.
v LED Indicator Menu
This menu displays the state of the processor subsystem disturbance/system
attention LED. Use this menu to toggle the attention/fault LEDs between identify
(blinking) and off. An example of this menu follows:
LED Indicator

1. CEC LED at location U0.1 Currently in IDENTIFY state

98. Return to Previous Menu

Enter LED index

0 >

The processor subsystem disturbance/system attention LED is on the operator panel.

48 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Language Selection Menu

The service processor menus and messages are available in various languages. This
menu allows selecting languages in which the service processor and system firmware
menus and messages are displayed.

LANGUAGE SELECTION MENU

1. English

2. Francais

3. Deutsch

4. Italiano

5. Espanol

6. Svenska

98. Return to Previous Menu

99. Exit from Menus

0>

Note: Your virtual terminal window must support the ISO-8859 character set to
correctly display languages other than English.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 49

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu

Note: The information in this section regarding the configuring of serial ports, and
modems attached to those serial ports, applies only to the serial ports (S1 and
S2) on the CEC backplane (location U0.1-P1). These serial ports are normally
used for call-in and call-out.

The call-out function is normally handled by the service focal point running on
the HMC.

None of these menus are applicable to the serial ports, or modems attached to
those serial ports, on the hardware management console (HMC).

CALL-IN/CALL-OUT SETUP MENU

1. Modem Configuration Menu

2. Serial Port Selection Menu

3. Serial Port Speed Setup Menu

4. Telephone Number Setup Menu

5. Call-Out Policy Setup Menu

6. Customer Account Setup Menu

7. Call-Out Test

98. Return to Previous Menu

99. Exit from Menus

0>

v Modem Configuration Menu, see “Modem Configuration Menu” on page 51.

v Serial Port Selection Menu, see “Serial Port Selection Menu” on page 52.
v Serial Port Speed Setup Menu, see “Serial Port Speed Setup Menu” on page 53.
v Telephone Number Setup Menu, see “Telephone Number Setup Menu” on page 54.
v Call-Out Policy Setup Menu, see “Call-Out Policy Setup Menu” on page 56.
v Customer Account Setup Menu, see “Customer Account Setup Menu” on page 57.
v Call-Out Test tests the configuration after the modem is installed and configured
correctly.

Note: If the system is running in Partition mode, this option is not supported.

50 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Modem Configuration Menu

Note: This option applies only to a modem attached to serial port 1 (S1) or serial port 2
(S2) on the CEC backplane.

The first two lines of the Modem Configuration Menu contain status of the current
selections. Selections are made in the sections labeled Modem Ports and Modem
Configuration File Name. Select the serial port that you want to activate and then select
the modem configuration file for the modem on the port. If you want to set up all of the
serial ports with modems, make your selections one port at a time.

Modem Configuration Menu

Port 1 Modem Configuration File Name:

Port 2 Modem Configuration File Name:

To make changes, First select the port and then the configuration file
name

Modem Ports:
1. Serial port 1
2. Serial port 2

Modem Configuration File Name:

5. none9. modem_z_sp
6. modem_f_sp 10. modem_m1_sp
7. modem_f0_sp 11. modem_m0_sp
8. modem_f1_sp 12. modem_m1_sp

30. Save configuration to NVRAM and Configure modem

98. Return to Previous Menu

0>

For information on choosing a modem configuration file, see “Sample Modem

Configuration Files” on page 183 and “Transfer of a Modem Session” on page 188.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 51

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Serial Port Selection Menu

This menu allows you to enable or disable the call-in and call-out functions of each
serial port in any combination.
Serial Port Selection Menu

1. Serial Port 1 Call-Out:

Currently Disabled

2. Serial Port 2 Call-Out:

Currently Disabled

3. Serial Port 1 Call-In:

Currently Disabled

4. Serial Port 2 Call-In:

Currently Disabled
98. Return to Previous Menu

0>

Call-in and ring indicate power-on cannot be enabled at the same time. If ring-indicate
power-on is already enabled and you try to enable call-in, a message prompts you for
confirmation. Refer to the message displayed on the screen.

52 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Serial Port Speed Setup Menu

This menu allows you to set serial port speed to enhance terminal performance or to
accommodate modem capabilities.

Serial Port Speed Setup Menu

1. Serial Port 1 Speed:

Currently 9600

2. Serial Port 2 Speed:

Currently 9600

98. Return to Previous Menu

0>

A serial port speed of 9600 baud or higher is recommended. The following are valid
serial port speeds:

50 600 4800
75 1200 7200
110 1800 9600
134 2000 19200
150 2400 38000
300 3600 57600
115200

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 53

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Telephone Number Setup Menu

Note: These menus are available, however, the function of calling out to report a
system failure is normally handled by the service focal point running on the
HMC.

Use this menu to set or change the telephone numbers for reporting a system failure.

Telephone Number Setup Menu

1. Service Center Telephone Number:

Currently Unassigned

2. Customer Administration Center Telephone Number:

Currently Unassigned

3. Digital Pager Telephone Number:

Currently Unassigned

4. Customer Voice Telephone Number:

Currently Unassigned

5. Customer System Telephone Number:

Currently Unassigned

98. Return to Previous Menu

0>

54 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v Service Center Telephone Number is the number of the service center computer.
The service center usually includes a computer that takes calls from servers with
call-out capability. This computer is referred to as the ″catcher.″ The catcher expects
messages in a specific format to which the service processor conforms.
For more information about the format and catcher computers, refer to the README
file in the AIX /usr/samples/syscatch directory. Contact your service provider for the
correct service center telephone number to enter. Until you have that number, leave
this field unassigned.
v Customer Administration Center Telephone Number is the number of the System
Administration Center computer (catcher) that receives problem calls from servers.
Contact your system administrator for the correct telephone number to enter here.
Until you have that number, leave this field unassigned.
v Digital Pager Telephone Number is the number for a numeric pager carried by
someone who responds to problem calls from your server. Contact your
administration center representative for the correct telephone number to enter. For
test purposes, use a test number, which you can change later (see the note on page
69).

Note: If the system is running in Partition mode, call-out is disabled. However, if the
system is booted in Full System Partition mode, at least one of the preceding
three telephone numbers must be assigned in order for the call-out test to
complete successfully.
v Customer Voice Telephone Number is the telephone number of a phone near the
server or answered by someone responsible for the server. This is the telephone
number left on the pager for callback. For test purposes, use a test number, which
you can change later.
v Customer System Telephone Number is the telephone number to which your
server’s modem is connected. The service or administrative center representatives
need this number to make direct contact with your server for problem investigation.
This is also referred to as the call-in phone number.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 55

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Call-Out Policy Setup Menu

Call out settings can be set using the following menu:

CALL-OUT POLICY SETUP MENU

1. Call-Out policy (First/All):

Currently First

2. Remote timeout, (in seconds):

Currently 120

3. Remote latency, (in seconds):

Currently 2

4. Number of retries:
Currently 2

98. Return to Previous Menu

0>

v Call-Out policy can be set to first or all. If call-out policy is set to first, the
service processor stops at the first successful call-out to one of the following
numbers in the order listed:
1. Service Center
2. Customer Administrative Center
3. Pager
If call-out policy is set to all, the service processor attempts a call-out to all of the
following numbers in the order listed:
1. Service Center
2. Customer Administrative Center
3. Pager
v Remote timeout and remote latency are functions of your service provider’s catcher
computer. Either use the defaults or contact your service provider for recommended
settings.
v Number of retries is the number of times you want the server to retry calls that
failed to complete.

56 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Customer Account Setup Menu

This menu allows users to enter information that is specific to their account.

Customer Account Setup Menu

1. Customer Account Number:

Currently Unassigned

2. Customer RETAIN Login userid:

Currently Unassigned

3. Customer RETAIN login password:

Currently Unassigned

98. Return to Previous Menu

0>

v Customer Account Number is assigned by your service provider for record-keeping

and billing. If you have an account number, enter it. Otherwise, leave this field
unassigned.
v Customer RETAIN Login User ID and Customer RETAIN Login Password apply
to a service function to which your service provider might have access. Leave these
fields unassigned if your service provider does not use RETAIN.

Call-out Test

Service Processor Parameters in Service Mode (Full System Partition)

When the system is in service mode, the following service-processor parameters are
suspended:
v Unattended Start Mode
v Reboot/Restart Policy
v Call-Out
v Surveillance

When service mode is exited, the service processor parameters revert to the customer
settings.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 57

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

System Power-On Methods

This section discusses the following system power-on methods:
v Power-on Switch
v Service Processor Menus
Privileged users can power on the system by selecting the System Control Power
Menu option from the main menu and then selecting the Power-on System option
from the System Power Control Menu. General users should select Power-on
System on the General User Menu.
v Remote Power-on via Ring-Indicate Signal
The server automatically powers on when it detects a ″ring indicate″ signal from a
modem attached to serial port 1 (S1) or serial port 2 (S2).
A remote user can call the server to activate ring detection by the modem. Listen for
a few more rings than the threshold number for starting the system. The system
powers on without answering the call.
v Unattended start mode - refer to Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode on page
38.
The service processor can be enabled to recover from the loss of ac power (see
Enable/Disable Unattended Power-On Mode in the SYSTEM POWER CONTROL
MENU). When ac power is restored, the system returns to the power state at the
time ac loss occurred. For example, if the system was powered on when ac loss
occurred, it reboots/restarts when power is restored. If the system was powered off
when ac loss occurred, it remains off when power is restored.

58 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v Timed power-on - refer to the shutdown -t command on servers using AIX.

Working in conjunction with AIX, the Service Processor in your server can operate a
timer, much like the wake-up timer on your clock radio. You can set the timer so that
your server powers on at a certain time after shutting down. The timer is
battery-operated, so power interruptions that occur while the server is off do not
affect its accuracy. Refer to the AIX shutdown -t command for details on setting the
timer.

Note: If an ac power loss is in progress when the timed power-on attempt occurs,
the server cannot power on when ac power is restored.
v Follow-up to a Failed Boot Attempt
The service processor initiates a power-on sequence if a failed boot attempt is
detected (due to a hardware or software failure).
v Fast or Slow Boot (IPL)
Using the service processor menus, you can select the IPL type, mode, and speed of
your system.
Attention: Selecting fast IPL results in several diagnostic tests being skipped and a
shorter memory test being run.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 59

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery

Reboot describes bringing the system hardware back up; for example, from a system
reset or power-on. The boot process ends when control passes to the operating system
process.

Restart describes activating the operating system after the system hardware is
reinitialized. Restart must follow a successful reboot.

Boot (IPL) Speed

When the server enters reboot recovery, slow IPL is automatically started, which gives
the POST an opportunity to locate and report any problems that might otherwise be
unreported.

Failure During Boot Process

During the boot process, either initially after system power-on or upon reboot after a
system failure, the service processor monitors the boot progress. If progress stops, the
service processor can reinitiate the boot process (reboot) if enabled to do so. The
service processor can re-attempt this process according to the number of retries
selected in the Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu.

Failure During Normal System Operation

When the boot process completes and control transfers to the operating system (OS),
the service processor can monitor operating system activity (see the Set Surveillance
Parameters option in the SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP MENU). If OS activity stops
due to a hardware- or software-induced failure, the service processor can initiate a
reboot/restart process based on the settings in the Service Processor Reboot/Restart
Policy Setup Menu and the OS automatic restart settings (see the operating system
documentation).

If you are using the AIX operating system, the menu item under SMIT for setting the
restart policy is Automatically Reboot After Crash (True/False). The default is false.
When the setting is true, and if the service processor parameter ″Use OS-Defined
Restart Policy″ is yes (the default), the service processor takes over for AIX to
reboot/restart after a hardware or surveillance failure.

60 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Service Processor Reboot/Restart Policy Controls

The operating system’s automatic restart policy (see operating system documentation)
indicates the operating system response to a system crash. The service processor can
be instructed to refer to that policy by the Use OS-Defined Restart Policy setup menu.

If the operating system has no automatic restart policy, or if it is disabled, then the
service processor-restart policy can be controlled from the service processor menus.
Use the Enable Supplemental Restart Policy selection.

Use OS-Defined restart policy - The default setting is yes. This causes the service
processor to refer to the OS Automatic Restart Policy setting and take action (the same
action the operating system would take if it could have responded to the problem
causing the restart).

When this setting is no, or if the operating system did not set a policy, the service
processor refers to enable supplemental restart policy for its action.

Enable supplemental restart policy - The default setting is no. If set to yes, the
service processor restarts the server when the operating system loses control and
either:
The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to No.
OR
The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to Yes and the operating system has no
automatic restart policy.

Refer to “Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery” on page 60.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 61

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

The following table describes the relationship among the operating system and service
processor restart controls:

OS Automatic Service processor to Service Processor System response

reboot/restart use OS-Defined Enable supplemental
after crash setting restart policy? restart policy?
None No No1
None No Yes Restarts
None Yes1 No1
None Yes1 Yes Restarts
False2 No No1
False2 No Yes Restarts
2 1 1
False Yes No
False2 Yes1 Yes
True No No1
True No Yes Restarts
1 1
True Yes No Restarts
True Yes1 Yes Restarts

1
Service processor default
2
AIX default

62 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

System Firmware Updates

This section provides information and instructions for updating the system firmware. You
may need to perform these steps if you are installing an option or if your support
representative has instructed you to update your firmware.

Always check the pSeries and RS/6000 Support Web site for the latest firmware images
and update instructions. The Web address is: http://www.rs6000.ibm.com/support/micro

Downloading the firmware update image and update instructions from the Web is
preferred.

If the system is running, but access to the Web is not available, see “System Firmware
Update Using a Locally Available Image” on page 64.

If the system cannot be powered on, but the service processor menus are available,
see “Updating System Firmware From the Service Processor Menus” on page 65.

If the service processor programming has been corrupted, the service processor will
automatically enter recovery mode when power is applied to the system. Recovery
mode is described later in this section.

To check the level of firmware that is currently on the system, see “Determining the
Level of Firmware on the System” on page 64.

General Information on System Firmware Updates

All the types of system firmware that can be reprogrammed are updated at the same
time. They are:
v System power control network programming
v Service processor programming
v IPL programming
v Run-time abstraction services

It is strongly recommended that you create a set of firmware update diskettes from the
Web site as soon as possible after a system is installed. As noted below, the diskette
images can be downloaded to any personal computer, pSeries, or RS/6000 system with
Internet access. This method is the only way to acquire a set of firmware update
diskettes; they cannot be created by using the service processor menus or by using
AIX.

Retain and store the latest firmware diskettes each time the firmware gets updated in
the event that the firmware becomes corrupted and must be reloaded.

Download the detailed instructions, as well as the latest flash images, from this Web
site. Before doing a system firmware update, check the Web site for the latest code and
images. Do not attempt a firmware update if you are unsure of the image you have, or
of the procedure required for the update.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 63

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

The images are available on the Web site in either DOS format or AIX (backup) format:
v If downloading to a PC, download the DOS image and follow the instructions. The
diskettes that are created will be in AIX (backup) format.
v If downloading to a pSeries or RS/6000 system, follow the instructions to create an
image on a disk drive or on diskettes.

Determining the Level of Firmware on the System

Note: This information may be superseded by the information that is available on the
Web site listed below. Always check the Web site for the latest images and
instructions for checking the firmware level. The Web address is:
http://www.rs6000.ibm.com/support/micro

The firmware level is denoted by XXYYMMDD, where XX = model designation, YY =

year, MM = month, and DD = day of the release.

The firmware level can be determined by either of the following methods:

v On the AIX command line, by typing:
lscfg -vp|grep -p Platform

A line that begins with ROM level (alterable).. displays the firmware level that is
currently on the system.
v Looking at the top of the service processor main menu.

System Firmware Update Using a Locally Available Image

To update the system firmware using a locally available image, perform the following
steps:
1. Log in as root user.
2. If the directory /tmp/fwupdate does not exist, create it by issuing the following
command:
mkdir /tmp/fwupdate
3. The firmware update file must be written into the /tmp/fwupdate directory on the
system. This can be done by using the ftp command to get the image from an ftp
server or NFS-mounting the directory on the host server, for example.
The firmware update file can also be transferred to the target system by backing up
the image onto diskette from another server and restoring it into the /tmp/fwupdate
directory.
After the firmware update file has been written into the /tmp/fwupdate directory,
verify its existence by entering the following command:
ls /tmp/fwupdate/RR*.img

The update file will have the format RRyymmdd.img. The RR indicates that this is
an update image for a system: yy is the year, mm is the month, and dd is the day of
the update file.
4. After the update file has been written to the /tmp/fwupdate directory, enter the
following commands:

64 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

cd /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin

./update_flash -f /tmp/fwupdate/RRyymmdd.img

Attention: Do not overlook the periods (.) in the commands shown above. AIX
commands are case-sensitive. Type them exactly as shown.

You will be asked for confirmation to proceed with the firmware update and the required
reboot. If you confirm, the system will apply the new firmware, reboot, and return to the
AIX prompt. This may take up to ten minutes depending on the configuration of the
system.

Attention: On some systems, the message Wait for rebooting before stopping
may display on the system console. Do not turn off the system until the system has fully
rebooted to the AIX login prompt. If a shutdown is necessary at that time, log in as root
user and issue the shutdown command.

While the update is in progress, you will see Rebooting... on the display for several
minutes.

The firmware update is complete.

Updating System Firmware From the Service Processor Menus

This procedure requires a set of firmware update diskettes in backup format.

The service processor menus are available while the system is powered off. As a
privileged user, from the service processor main menu, select Service Processor
Setup, then select Reprogram Flash EPROM Menu. The update process requests
update diskettes as needed.

Updating System Firmware from the AIX Service Aids

Note: This service aid is supported only in online diagnostics.

Refer to the detailed instructions that are provided on the Web site with the latest
image.

Updating System Firmware from the AIX Command Line

Refer to the detailed instructions that are provided on the Web site with the latest
image.

Note: The update process can take up to sixty minutes, and the system reboots itself
during the update process.

Recovery Mode
If the service processor detects that its programming has been corrupted when it is
powering up to standby mode, it will enter recovery mode. In recovery mode, it will ask
for the firmware update diskettes by putting eight-digit codes on the operator panel.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 65

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

The eight-digit codes are as follows:

Code Action
A1FD 0000 System firmware has been corrupted and must be reflashed.
A1FD 0001 Insert update diskette 1.
A1FD 0002 Insert update diskette 2.
A1FD 0003 Insert update diskette 3.
A1FD 000n Insert update diskette n.

Notes:
1. If the wrong diskette is inserted at any time, or if the diskette is left in the drive after
it has been read, B1FD 001F is displayed, indicating that the wrong diskette is in the
drive.
2. If B1FD 001A is displayed at any time during the process, the service processor must
be reset by activating the pinhole reset switch on the primary drawer operator panel.

After the update process is complete, the service processor resets itself and goes
through a complete reboot.

Configuring and Deconfiguring Processors or Memory

All failures that crash the system with a machine check or check stop, even if
intermittent, are reported as a diagnostic callout for service repair. To prevent the
recurrence of intermittent problems and improve the availability of the system until a
scheduled maintenance window, processors and memory books with a failure history
are marked ″bad″ to prevent their being configured on subsequent boots.

A processor or memory book is marked ″bad″ under the following circumstances:

v A processor or memory book fails built-in self-test (BIST) or power-on self-test
(POST) testing during boot (as determined by the service processor).
v A processor or memory book causes a machine check or check stop during runtime,
and the failure can be isolated specifically to that processor or memory book (as
determined by the processor runtime diagnostics in the service processor).
v A processor or memory book reaches a threshold of recovered failures that results in
a predictive callout (as determined by the processor run-time diagnostics in the
service processor).

During boot time, the service processor does not configure processors or memory
books that are marked “bad.”

If a processor or memory book is deconfigured, the processor or memory book remains

offline for subsequent reboots until it is replaced or repeat gard is disabled. The repeat
gard function also provides the user with the option of manually deconfiguring a
processor or memory book, or re-enabling a previously deconfigured processor or
memory book. For information on configuring or deconfiguring a processor, see the
Processor Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu on page 44. For information on

66 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

configuring or deconfiguring a memory book, see the Memory

Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu on page 45. Both of these menus are submenus
under the System Information Menu.

You can enable or disable CPU Repeat Gard or Memory Repeat Gard using the
Processor Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu, which is a submenu under the System
Information Menu.

Run-Time CPU Deconfiguration (CPU Gard)

L1 instruction cache recoverable errors, L1 data cache correctable errors, and L2 cache
correctable errors are monitored by the processor runtime diagnostics (PRD) code
running in the service processor. When a predefined error threshold is met, an error log
with warning severity and threshold exceeded status is returned to AIX. At the same
time, PRD marks the CPU for deconfiguration at the next boot. AIX will attempt to
migrate all resources associated with that processor to another processor and then stop
the defective processor.

Service Processor System Monitoring - Surveillance

Surveillance is a function in which the service processor monitors the system, and the
system monitors the service processor. This monitoring is accomplished by periodic
samplings called heartbeats.

Surveillance is available during two phases:

v System firmware bringup (automatic)
v Operating system runtime (optional)

System Firmware Surveillance

System firmware surveillance is automatically enabled during system power-on. It
cannot be disabled by the user, and the surveillance interval and surveillance delay
cannot be changed by the user.

If the service processor detects no heartbeats during system IPL (for a set period of
time), it cycles the system power to attempt a reboot. The maximum number of retries
is set from the service processor menus. If the fail condition persists, the service
processor leaves the machine powered on, logs an error, and displays menus to the
user. If Call-out is enabled, the service processor calls to report the failure and displays
the operating-system surveillance failure code on the operator panel.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 67

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Operating System Surveillance

Operating system surveillance provides the service processor with a means to detect
hang conditions, as well as hardware or software failures, while the operating system is
running. It also provides the operating system with a means to detect a service
processor failure caused by the lack of a return heartbeat.

Operating system surveillance is not enabled by default, allowing you to run operating
systems that do not support this service processor option.

You can also use service processor menus and AIX service aids to enable or disable
operating system surveillance.

For operating system surveillance to work correctly, you must set these parameters:
v Surveillance enable/disable
v Surveillance interval
The maximum time the service processor should wait for a heartbeat from the
operating system before timeout.
v Surveillance delay
The length of time to wait from the time the operating system is started to when the
first heartbeat is expected.

Surveillance does not take effect until the next time the operating system is started after
the parameters have been set.

If desired, you can initiate surveillance mode immediately from service aids. In addition
to the three options above, a fourth option allows you to select immediate surveillance,
and rebooting of the system is not necessarily required.

If operating system surveillance is enabled (and system firmware has passed control to
the operating system), and the service processor does not detect any heartbeats from
the operating system, the service processor assumes the system is hung and takes
action according to the reboot/restart policy settings. See “Service Processor
Reboot/Restart Recovery” on page 60.

If surveillance is selected from the service processor menus which are only available at
bootup, then surveillance is enabled by default as soon as the system boots. From
service aids, the selection is optional.

68 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Call-Out (Call-Home)

Note: The call-out function is handled by the Service Focal point application on the
Hardware Management Console (HMC).

The service processor can call out (call-home) when it detects one of the following
conditions:
v System firmware surveillance failure
v Operating system surveillance failure (if supported by operating system)
v Restarts
v Critical hardware failure
v Abnormal operating system termination

To enable the call-out feature, do the following:

1. Connect a modem to any serial port.
2. Set up the following using the service processor menus or diagnostic service aids:
v Enable call-out for the serial port where the modem is connected.
v Enter the modem configuration file name.
v Set up site-specific parameters (phone numbers for call-out, call-out policy,
number of call-out retries, and so on).
3. To call out before restart, set Call-out before restart to ENABLED from the
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup menu.

Note: Some modems, such as IBM 7857-017, are not designed for the paging function.
Although they can be used for paging, they will return an error message when
they do not get the expected response from another modem. Therefore, even
though the paging was successful, the error message will cause the service
processor to retry, continuing to place pager calls for the number of retries
specified in the call-out policy setup menu. These retries result in redundant
pages.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 69

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Console Mirroring
Console mirroring allows a user on one serial port to monitor the service processor
activities on another serial port. This can be done on the locally attached HMC virtual
terminal window or windows remotely attached through modems. Console mirroring is
supported on any combination of locally or remotely attached monitors.

The serial port from which console mirroring is enabled is called the primary port. The
mirror port is determined when keyboard input is detected from one of the other two
serial ports. From this point forward, the service processor sends information to the
active port and the mirror port only. Console mirroring ends when the service processor
releases control of the serial ports to the system firmware.

Console mirroring is supported on serial port 1 (S1), serial port 2 (S2), and serial port 3
(S3). Remote attachment through modem is supported on serial port 1 (S1) and serial
port 2 (S2).

System Configuration
The following describes the configuration for console mirroring:
v Service processor
v Modem connected to one serial port and enabled for incoming calls
v Local HMC virtual terminal window connected to the other serial port. This local
terminal can be connected directly to your server or connected through another
modem.

Console mirroring can be started by either of the following methods:

v Remote session first, then local session added:
1. Remote session is already in progress.
2. Remote user uses service processor menus to enable console mirroring, allowing
both consoles to be active.
v Local session first, then remote session added:
1. Local session is already in progress.
2. The service processor receives a call from the remote user.
3. The local user selects the option to enable console mirroring. The service
processor immediately begins mirroring service processor menus.

70 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Service Processor Error Logs

The service processor error logs, an example of which is shown below, contain error
conditions detected by the service processor.

Error Log

1. 11/30/99 19:41:56 Service Processor Firmware Failure

B1004999

Enter error number for more details.

Press Return to continue, or ’x’ to return to menu.
Press "C" to clear error log, any other key to continue. >

Note: The time stamp in this error log is coordinated universal time (UTC), which is
also referred to as Greenwich mean time (GMT). AIX error logs have additional
information available and can time stamp with local time.

Entering an error number provides nine words of system reference code (SRC) data; an
example screen is shown below.

Detail: 6005

SRC
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
word11:B1004999 word12:0110005D word13:00000000
word14:00000000 word15:00001111 word16:00000 000
word17:B1004AAA word18:0114005D word19:A4F1E909

B1004999

Press Return to continue, or ’x’ to return to menu.

If Return is pressed, the contents of NVRAM will be dumped 320 bytes at a time,
starting at address 0000.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 71

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

LCD Progress Indicator Log

The following is an example of the LCD progress indicator log. It shows the types of
entries that may appear in the log, and is for example purposes only.

The progress indicator codes are listed from top (latest) to bottom (oldest).
LCD Progress Indicator Log
B0FF
0539..17
0538..17
0539..17
0538..17
0539..17
0581
0538..17
0539..12
0538..12
0539..
0821..01-K1-00
0539..
0728..01-R1-00-00
0539..
0664..40-60-00-1,0
0539..
0777..U0.1-P2-I1/E1
0539..
0742..U0.1-P2-I2/E1
0539..
0776..U0.1-P2-I3/T1
E139
E1FB
E139
E183
Press Return to continue, or ’x’ to return to menu. >
EAA1..U0.1-P1-I4
E172..U0.1-P1
E172..U0.1-P1-I4
E172..U0.1-P1
94BB
9109
9380
9108
9107
9106
9105
9118
9104
9103
9102
90FD

72 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Service Processor Operational Phases

This section provides a high-level flow of the phases of the service processor.
SP Power Applied

Pre-Standby Phase

Standby Phase SP Menus Available

Bring-Up Phase SMS Menus Available

Run-time Phase AIX Login Prompt Available

Pre-Standby Phase
This phase is entered when the server is connected to a power source. The server may
or may not be fully powered on. This phase is exited when the power-on self-tests
(POSTs) and configurations tasks are completed.

The pre-standby phase components are:

v Service Processor Initialization - service processor performs any necessary hardware
and software initialization.
v Service Processor POST - service processor conducts Power-on self-tests on its
various work and code areas.
v Service Processor Unattended Start Mode Checks - To assist fault recovery. If
unattended start mode is set, the service processor automatically reboots the server.
The service processor does not wait for user input or power-on command, but moves
through the phase and into the bring-up phase. Access the SMS menus or the
service processor menus to reset the unattended start mode.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 73

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Standby Phase
The standby phase can be reached in either of two ways:
v With the server off and power connected (the normal path), recognized by OK in the
LCD display.
OR
v With the server on after an operating system fault, recognized by an 8-digit code in
the LCD display.

In the standby phase, the service processor takes care of some automatic duties and is
available for menus operation. The service processor remains in the standby phase
until a power-on request is detected.

The standby phase components are as follows:

v Modem Configuration
The service processor configures the modem (if installed) so that incoming calls can
be received, or outgoing calls can be placed.
v Dial In
Monitor incoming phone line to answer calls, prompt for a password, verify the
password, and remotely display the standby menu. The remote session can be
mirrored on the local HMC virtual terminal window if the server is so equipped and if
the user enables this function.
v Menus
The service processor menus are password-protected. Before you can access them,
you need either the general user-password or privileged-user password.
Service processor menus are available on ASCII terminals attached to the serial
ports on the system, and on terminal emulators. On HMC-managed systems, service
processor menus are also available on the HMC graphical user interface.

Bring-Up Phase
The bring-up phase components are as follows:
v Retry Request Check
The service processor checks to see if the previous boot attempt failed. If the
specified number of failures are detected, the service processor displays an error
code and places an outgoing call to notify an external party if the user has enabled
this option.
v Dial Out
The service processor can dial a preprogrammed telephone number in the event of
an IPL failure. The service processor issues an error report with the last reported IPL
status indicated and any other available error information.

74 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v Update Operator Panel

The service processor displays operator panel data on the HMC virtual terminal
window if a remote connection is active.
v Environmental Monitoring
The service processor provides expanded error recording and reporting.
v System Firmware Surveillance (Heartbeat Monitoring)
The service processor monitors and times the interval between system firmware
heartbeats.
v Responding to System Processor Commands
The service processor responds to any command issued by the system processor.

Runtime Phase
This phase includes the tasks that the service processor performs during steady-state
execution of the operating system.
v Environmental Monitoring
The service processor monitors voltages, temperatures, and fan speeds (on some
servers).
v Responding to System Processor Commands
The service processor responds to any command issued by the system processor.
v Run-Time Surveillance
If the device driver is installed and surveillance enabled, the service processor
monitors the system heartbeat. If the heartbeat times out, the service processor
places an outgoing call. This is different from the bring-up phase scenario, where the
specified number of reboot attempts are made before placing an outgoing call.
v HMC surveillance
On an HMC-managed system, the service processor monitors the communication link
between the managed system and the HMC. If the service processor detects that this
communication link has been broken, it will post an error to the operating system
running on the managed system.

Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 75

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

76 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Chapter 4. Using System Management Services

Use the system management services menus to view information about your system or
partition, and to perform tasks such as setting a password, changing the boot list, and
setting the network parameters.

To start the system management services, do the following:

1. Turn on or restart the system.
2. The POST indicators words memory, keyboard, network, scsi, speaker appear
across the bottom of the screen.
Press the numeric 1 key after the word keyboard appears, and before the word
speaker appears.
For more information on the POST indicator words, refer to .

Note: The System Management Services can also be started using the Service
Processor Boot Mode Menu. See page 42.

After the system management services starts, the following Utilities screen displays:

Utilities

1 Password Utilities
2 Display Error Log
3 Remote Initial Program Load Setup
4 SCSI Utilities
5 Select Console
6 MultiBoot
7 Select Language
8 OK Prompt

.------.
|X=Exit|
`------’
===>

Each option on the system management services utilities menu is described in this
section.

77
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Password Utilities
Entering this selection permits access to the options shown on the following screen:

Password Utilities

1 Set Privileged Access-Password

2 Remove Privileged-Access Password
3 Unattended Start Mode <ON>

.------.
|X=Exit|
`------’
===>

Set Privileged-Access Password: The privileged-access password protects against

the unauthorized starting of the system programs. When this option is selected, another
screen displays that allows the setting of a password.

You can set the password from either the service processor or system management
services menus. After the password is set, both the service processor and system
management services automatically use the same password. The password is limited to
eight characters.

Remove Privileged-Access Password: If you previously had set a privileged-access

password and want to remove it, select Remove Privileged-Access Password.

Unattended Start Mode <ON>: This selection is used to enable or disable unattended
start mode. Use this option to instruct the service processor to restore the power-state
of the server after a temporary power failure, which is necessary on servers that require
automatic power-on after a power failure. The default setting is on.

78 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Display Error Log

A screen similar to the following displays when you select this option. You can view or
clear your system error log.

.--------------------------------------------------------.
| Error Log |
| |
| |
| Date Time ErrorCode Location |
| Entry 1. 99/06/30 02:15:35 25a80011 U0.1-P1-C1 |
| Entry 2. 99/07/01 03:18:36 20300026 U0.1-P1-C1 |
`--------------------------------------------------------’

.-----------------. .-----------.
|C=Clear Error Log| |X=Exit Log |
`-----------------’ `-----------’

Note: The time stamp in this error log is coordinated universal time (UTC), which is
also referred to as Greenwich mean time (GMT). AIX error logs have more
information available and can time stamp with your local time.

Chapter 4. Using System Management Services 79

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Remote Initial Program Load Setup

This option allows you to enable and set up the remote startup of your system or
partition. You must first specify the network parameters as shown in the following
screen:

Network Parameters

1. IP Parameters
2. Adapter Parameters
3. Ping

.------.
|X=Exit|
`------’

===>

Note: Some applications may require that IP addresses contain leading zeroes for
numbers less than 100. For example, 129.132.4.20 may need to be entered as
129.132.004.020.

80 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

IP Parameters
Select the IP Parameters option from the Network Parameters menu to display a
screen similar to the following:

IP Parameters

1. Client IP Address [9.3.146.162]

2. Server IP Address [9.3.146.171]
3. Gateway IP Address [0.0.0.0]
4. Subnet Mask [255.255.255.0]

.------.
|X=Exit|
`------’
===>

To set an address using this menu, do the following:

1. Type the number of the selection (1, 2, 3, or 4).
2. Enter the address on the next screen.

Attention: If the client system and the server are on the same subnet, set the
gateway IP address to [0.0.0.0].

Chapter 4. Using System Management Services 81

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Adapter Parameters
Select the Adapter Parameters option from the Network Parameters menu to view an
adapter’s hardware address, as well as configure network adapters that require setup. A
screen similar to the following displays when you make this selection:

Adapter Parameters

Device Slot Hardware Address

1. Gigabit Ethernet U0.1-P2-I4/E1 0004ac7c0135

2. token-ring U0.1-P2-I5/T1 0020357a9105
3. ethernet Integrated: U0.1-P2/E1 0060949d7ac5
4. ethernet U0.1-P2-I2/E1 0004ac5e692b
5. token-ring U0.1-P2-I3/T1 0004ac634e38

.------.
|X=Exit|
`------’
(PRESS ENTER AFTER MAKING A SELECTION) ===>

Select an adapter on this screen to display configuration menus for that adapter. If
Ethernet is selected, you can set parameters that control how the Ethernet adapter
communicates with the network. For example, the following screen shows the menu for
the Ethernet adapter configuration:

1. Data Rate [Auto]

2. Full Duplex [No]

82 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Ping
Select Ping from the Network Parameters menu to test a connection to a remote
system unit. After selecting the Ping option, you must first choose an adapter to
communicate with the remote system.

Adapter Parameters

Device Slot Hardware Address

1. Gigabit Ethernet U0.1-P2-I4/E1 0004ac7c0135

2. token-ring U0.1-P2-I5/T1 0020357a9105
3. ethernet Integrated: U0.1-P2/E1 0060949d7ac5
4. ethernet U0.1-P2-I2/E1 0004ac5e692b
5. token-ring U0.1-P2-I3/T1 0004ac634e38

.------.
|X=Exit|
`------’
(PRESS ENTER AFTER MAKING A SELECTION) ===>

After determining which adapter to use to ping the remote system, you must provide the
addresses needed to communicate with the remote system. Select the appropriate
device from the Ping menu to display a screen similar to the following:

PING IP Address

1. Client IP Address [9.3.146.162]

2. Server IP Address [9.3.146.171]
3. Gateway IP Address [0.0.0.0]
4. Subnet Mask [0.0.0.0]

.---------. .------.
|E=Execute| |X=Exit|
`---------’ `------’

===>

Chapter 4. Using System Management Services 83

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

SCSI Utilities
SCSI Utilities allow you to set delay times for the SCSI hard disk spin-up and to set
SCSI IDs for SCSI controllers installed in the system.

SCSI Utilities

1. Harddrive Spin Up Delay

2. Change SCSI Id

.--------.
| X=Exit |
`--------’
===>

Using the Harddrive Spin Up Delay option allows you to change the spin up delay
time for SCSI hard disk drives attached to your system. Spin up delay values can be
entered manually, or you can use a default setting (two seconds). All values are
measured in seconds.

Attention: Setting the value lower than the default can prevent successful booting
because the system power handling capabilities might be exceeded. If the system no
longer boots after setting this value, access this utility again and increase the value. It is
also possible that adding disk drives can cause similar symptoms. Changing this value
changes the surge current requirements on the system. As you increase the value, the
surge current requirements on the system are decreased.

Select Console
Select this option to define which display is used by the system for system
management. If no console is selected, the console defaults to serial port 1 on the
primary I/O book.

Press 0 to select this console

as the active console

84 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Multiboot
Multiboot allows you to select a method for booting the system.
Multiboot

1 Select Software
2 Software Default
3 Select Install Device
4 Select Boot Devices
5 OK Prompt
6 Multiboot Startup <OFF>

.------.
|X=Exit|
`------’

===>

Select Software
This option is used when more than one operating system is installed on the same disk
drive. AIX does not support multiple operating systems on a single disk drive. Multiple
AIX images can be installed on separate disk drives; the desired disk drive can be
selected for booting using the Select Boot Device function in System Management
Services or the AIX diagnostic service aid Display or Change Bootlist.

If Select Software is chosen from this menu, a line similar to the following is displayed:
–> 1 AIX 5.1.0 <-

This indicates the current version of AIX that is installed on the system. If a 1 is
entered, the system will boot AIX.

If you are running on AIX and you receive the following message:
No Operating System Installed

this indicates that information in nonvolatile storage could have been lost, as would
happen if the battery had been removed. To re-create this value, run the Select Boot
Device option on this menu.

The AIX Documentation library is available at the following Web address:

http://www.ibm.com/servers/aix/library/techpubs.html. AIX documentation is also
contained on the AIX Documentation CD. The documentation is made accessible by
loading the documentation CD onto the hard disk or by mounting the CD in the
CD-ROM drive.

Chapter 4. Using System Management Services 85

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Software Default
This option is used when more than one operating system is installed on the same disk
drive. AIX does not support multiple operating systems on a single disk drive. Multiple
AIX images can be installed on separate disk drives; the desired disk drive can be
selected for booting using the Select Boot Device function in System Management
Services or the AIX diagnostic service aid Display or Change Bootlist.

If Software Default is chosen from this menu, a line similar to the following is
displayed:
–> 1 AIX 5.1.0 <-

This indicates the current version of AIX that is installed on the system.

If you are running on AIX and you receive the following message:
No Operating System Installed

this indicates that information in nonvolatile storage could have been lost, as would
happen if the battery had been removed. To re-create this value, run the Select Boot
Device option on this menu.

Select Install Device

Select this option to produce a list of devices, such as the CD-ROM, from which the
operating system may be installed. Select a device, and the system searches that
device for an operating system to install. If the device supported by the operating
system is that device, the name of the operating system displays.

Select Boot Devices

Select this option to view and change the customized boot list, which is the sequence of
devices that the system searches when booting an operating system. The boot list can
contain up to five devices. The following is an example of this screen.
Select Boot Devices

1 Display Current Settings

2 Restore Default Settings
3 Configure 1st Boot Device
4 Configure 2nd Boot Device
5 Configure 3rd Boot Device
6 Configure 4th Boot Device
7 Configure 5th Boot Device

.------.
|X=Exit|
`------’

====>

86 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Display Current Settings

Lists the current order of devices in the boot list. The following is an example of this
screen.
Current Boot Sequence

1. Diskette
2. SCSI CD-ROM id=1 ( loc=U0.1-P2/Z2-A9,0 )
3. SCSI 9100 MB Harddisk id=5 ( loc=U0.1-P2/Z2-A8,0 )
4. Ethernet ( loc=U0.1-P1/E1 )
5. None

.------.
|X=Exit|
`------’

===>

Chapter 4. Using System Management Services 87

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Restore Default Settings

Restores the boot list to the following default sequence:

v Primary diskette drive
v CD-ROM drive
v Tape (if installed)
v Hard disk drive
v Network device

Selecting any of the Configure Boot Device options displays a screen similar to the
following.

Configure Nth Boot Device

Device Current Device

Number Position Name

1 1 Diskette
2 4 Ethernet ( loc=U0.1-P1/E1 )
3 - Token-Ring ( loc=U0.1-P2-I1/T1 )
4 2 SCSI CD-ROM id=8 ( loc=U0.1-P2/Z1-A8,0 )
5 3 SCSI 18200 MB Harddisk id=9 ( loc=U0.1-P2/Z2-A9,0 )

.------.
|X=Exit|
`------’

===>

88 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Multiboot Startup <OFF>

Toggles between off and on to select whether Multiboot menu starts automatically on
startup.

Select Language
Select this option to change the language used by the system management services
screens and the service processor menus.

Select Language

1. English
2. Francais
3. Deutsch
4. Italiano
5. Espanol

===> .------.
|X=Exit|
`------’

Note: To correctly display languages other than English, your system or your virtual
terminal window must support the ISO-8859 character set.

OK Prompt
This option is for service personnel only to obtain additional debug information. It
provides access to the open firmware command prompt. If it is necessary to exit from
the open firmware command prompt, type:
reset-all

Exiting System Management Services

After you have finished using the system management services, type x (for exit) at the
Utilities screen to boot your system or partition. On all other screens, typing x returns
you to the previous screen.

Chapter 4. Using System Management Services 89

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

90 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Chapter 5. Using the Standalone and Online Diagnostics

The diagnostics consist of Standalone Diagnostics and Online Diagnostics. The
Standalone Diagnostics must be booted before they are run. If booted, they have no
access to the AIX Error Log or the AIX Configuration Data.

Online Diagnostics, when installed, are resident with AIX on the disk or server. They
can be booted in single user mode (called service mode), run in maintenance mode
(called maintenance mode), or run concurrently (called concurrent mode) with other
applications. They have access to the AIX Error Log and the AIX Configuration Data.

Attention: If this system unit is attached to another system, be sure you isolate this
system unit before stopping the operating system or running diagnostic programs.
Some system-cabling changes (such as installing wrap plugs or removing a device from
the configuration) may require action by the operator of the attached system before
making the cabling changes on this system.

Standalone and Online Diagnostics Operating Considerations

Consider the following before using the diagnostics:
v Run Online Diagnostics in Service Mode when possible, unless otherwise directed.
The Online Diagnostics perform additional functions, compared to Standalone
Diagnostics. The AIX error log and certain SMIT functions are only available when
diagnostics are run from the disk drive.
v When running Online Diagnostics, device support for some devices may not have
been installed. If this is the case, that device does not appear in the resource list.
v When running Standalone Diagnostics, device support for some devices may be
contained on supplemental diagnostic media. If this is the case, the device does not
appear in the resource list when running diagnostics unless the supplemental media
has been processed.
v Support for some TTY terminals is optionally installed. If you attach a TTY terminal to
a system to run diagnostics, it might not work correctly because the AIX support for
the terminal might not be installed.

Selecting a Console Display

When you run Standalone Diagnostics (and under some conditions Online Diagnostics),
you must select the console display. The diagnostics display instructions on any
graphics display and the terminal attached to the S1 serial port.

Identifying the Terminal Type to the Diagnostics Programs

Note: This is a different function from selecting a console display.

When you run diagnostics, you must identify what type of terminal you are using. If the
terminal type is not known when the FUNCTION SELECTION menu is displayed, the
diagnostics do not allow you to continue until a terminal is selected from the DEFINE
TERMINAL option menu. Select lft for adapter-attached displays.

91
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Undefined Terminal Types

If you specify an undefined terminal type from the DEFINE TERMINAL option menu, the
menu prompts you to enter a valid terminal type. The menu redisplays until either a
valid type is entered or the user exits the DEFINE TERMINAL option.

Resetting the Terminal

If you enter a terminal type that is valid (according to the DEFINE TERMINAL option
menu) but is not the correct type for the ASCII terminal being used, you may be unable
to read the screen, use the function keys, or use the Enter key. Bypass these difficulties
by pressing Ctrl-C to reset the terminal. The screen display which results from this
resetting action depends on the mode in which the system is being run:
v Online Normal or Maintenance Mode - The command prompt displays.
v Standalone Mode or Online Service Mode - The terminal type is reset to dumb, the
Diagnostic Operating Instruction panel displays, and you are required to go through
the DEFINE TERMINAL process again.

Running Online Diagnostics from CD-ROM

Consider the following when you run the Online Diagnostics from a server or a disk:
v The diagnostic CD-ROM disc must remain in the CD-ROM drive for the entire time
that diagnostics are running.
v The diagnostic CD-ROM disc cannot be ejected from the CD-ROM drive once the
diagnostic programs load. The diagnostic CD-ROM disc can only be ejected after the
system has been powered off and then powered on (Standalone mode), or after the
diagnostics program has terminated (Online concurrent mode). The diagnostic
CD-ROM disc must be ejected before attempts to load the diagnostic programs
again.
v The CD-ROM drive from which diagnostics were loaded cannot be tested.
v The SCSI adapter (or circuitry) controlling the CD-ROM drive from which diagnostics
were loaded cannot be tested.

Running Standalone Diagnostics from a Network Installation Management (NIM)

Server
A client system connected to a network with a Network Installation Management (NIM)
server, is capable of booting Standalone Diagnostics from the NIM server if the client
system is registered on the NIM server, and the NIM boot settings on both the NIM
server and the client system are correct.
Notes:
1. For NIM clients that have adapters which would normally require that supplemental
media be loaded when standalone diagnostics are run from CD-ROM, the support
code for these adapters needs to be loaded into the directory pointed to by the NIM
SPOT from which you wish to boot that client. Before running standalone
diagnostics on these clients from the NIM server, the NIM server system
administrator must ensure that any needed support for these devices is loaded on
the server.
2. The amount of system memory required to run Standalone Diagnostics from a NIM
server using the bos.diag.rte fileset at level 4.3.3.25, is 64 MB.

92 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

To determine the fileset level, run the following AIX command at the NIM server
(you must have root authority):
nim -o showres SPOTNAME | grep bos.diag.rte

(Where SPOTNAME is the name of the SPOT from which you want to do a NIM
boot (example, SPOT433).

Use one of the following methods to determine the amount of available system
memory:
v Run the Display Resource Attributes task for resource.
v Use the Config option under System Management Services (see the system unit
service guide).
v Use the following AIX command:
lsattr -E -l mem0
3. All operations to configure the NIM server require root authority.
4. If you replace the network adapter in the client, the network adapter hardware
address for the client must be updated on the NIM server.
5. The Control state (Cstate) for standalone clients on the NIM server should be kept
in the Diagnostic Boot has been Enabled state.
6. On the client system, the NIM server network adapter should be put in the bootlist
after the boot disk drive. This allows the system to boot up in Standalone
Diagnostics from the NIM server should there be a problem booting from the disk
drive. Refer to the ″Multiboot″ section under SMS chapter in the service guide for
the client system to obtain information about setting the bootlist.

NIM Server Configuration

Refer to the Network Installation Management Guide and Reference for information on
doing the following:
v Register a client on the NIM server.
v Enable a client to run diagnostics from the NIM server.

To verify that the client system is registered on the NIM server and diagnostic boot is
enabled; from the command line on the NIM server, run the following command:
lsnim -a Cstate -Z ClientName

Refer to the following table for system responses.

Note: The ClientName is the name of the system on which you are wanting to run the
Standalone Diagnostics.

System Response Client Status

#name:Cstate: The client system is registered on the NIM

ClientName: diagnostic boot has been server and enabled to run diagnostics from the
enabled: NIM server.

Chapter 5. Using the Standalone and Online Diagnostics 93

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

System Response Client Status

#name:Cstate: The client system is registered on the NIM

ClientName:ready for a NIM operation: server but not enabled to run standalone
or diagnostics from the NIM server.
#name:Cstate: Note: If the client system is registered on the
ClientName:BOS installation has been NIM server but Cstate has not been enabled,
enabled: no data will be returned.

0042-053 lsnim: there is no NIM object The client is not registered on the NIM server.
named "ClientName"

Client Configuration and Booting Standalone Diagnostics from the

NIM Server
To run Standalone Diagnostics on a client system from the NIM server, do the following:
1. Remove all removable media (tape or CD-ROM disc).
2. Stop all programs, including the AIX operating system (get help if needed).
3. Turn off the system unit power.
4. Turn on the system unit power.
5. When the keyboard indicator displays (the word keyboard on an ASCII terminal or
the Keyboard icon on a graphical display), press the number 1 key on the
keyboard to display the SMS menu.
6. Enter any requested passwords.
7. Select Utilities.
8. Depending on the console type, select RIPL or Remote Initial Program Load
Setup.
9. Depending on the console type, select Set Address or IP Parameters.
10. Enter the client address, server address, gateway address (if applicable), and
subnet mask into the Remote Initial Program Load (RIPL). If there is no gateway
between the NIM server and the client, set the gateway address to 0.0.0.0. To
determine if there is a gateway, either ask the system network administrator or
compare the first 3 octets of the NIM server address and the client address. If they
are the same, (for example, if the NIM server address is 9.3.126.16 and the client
address is 9.3.126.42, the first 3 octets (9.3.126) are the same), then set the
gateway address in the RIPL field to 0.0.0.0.

Note: RIPL is located under the Utility menu in System Management Services
(SMS) and should be referred to for information on setting these
parameters.
11. If the NIM server is setup to allow the pinging of the client system, use the ping
option in the RIPL utility to verify that the client system can ping the NIM server.
Under the Ping utility, choose the network adapter that provides the attachment to
the NIM server to do the ping operation. If the ping comes back with an OK
prompt, the client is prepared to boot from the NIM server. If ping returns with a
FAILED prompt, the client does not proceed with the boot.

94 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Note: If the ping fails, refer to ″Boot Problems/Concerns″ in the service guide for
the system unit. Then follow the steps for network boot problems.

Use the following procedure to temporarily changes the system bootlist so that the
network adapter attached to the NIM server network, is first in the bootlist:
1. Exit to the SMS Main screen.
2. Depending on the console type, select Multiboot or Select Boot Devices.
3. Depending on the console type, select Boot Sequence or Select Boot Devices.
4. Record the current bootlist settings. (You will have to set the bootlist back to the
original settings after running diagnostics from the NIM server.)
5. Change the bootlist so the network adapter attached to the NIM server is first in the
bootlist.
6. Exit completely from SMS. The system should start loading packets while doing a
bootp from the network.

Follow the instructions on the screen to select the system console.

If Diagnostics Operating Instructions Version x.x.x is displays, Standalone Diagnostics

has loaded successfully. If the AIX login prompt displays, Standalone Diagnostics did
not load. Check the following items:
v The bootlist on the client might be incorrect.
v Cstate on the NIM server might be incorrect.
v There might be network problems preventing you from connecting to the NIM server.

Verify the settings and the status of the network. If you continue to have problems, refer
to ″Boot Problems/Concerns″ in the service guide for the system unit. Then follow the
steps for network boot problems.

After running diagnostics, reboot the system and use SMS to change the bootlist
sequence back to the original settings.

Locking and Unlocking the Electronic Service Agent

If the system is setup with a Electronic Service Agent, you must lock out the Electronic
Service Agent before running diagnostics. This prevents the Electronic Service Agent
from using the diagnostics while you are running them. Use the following commands to
lock out the Electronic Service Agent:
cd /usr/lpp/servdir
ls /usr/lpp/servdir/servdir.lck

If a file named servdir.lck is listed, the Electronic Service Agent is already locked out. If
it is not listed, use the following command to create the file:
/usr/lpp/servdir/servdir.lck

Use the following command to check that the servdir.lck file was created (if the file is
present the Electronic Service Agent is locked out):
/usr/lpp/servdir/servdir.lck

Chapter 5. Using the Standalone and Online Diagnostics 95

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Use the following commands to unlock the Electronic Service Agent:

/usr/lpp/servdir/servdir.analyze reset
rm /usr/lpp/servdir/servdir.lck

Use the following command to check that the servdir.lck file was deleted (the file
should not be present):
ls /usr/lpp/servdir/servdir.lck

If the file is listed, the Electronic Service Agent is still locked out.

Locking and Unlocking the Service Agent

If the system is setup with a service agent, you must lock out the service agent before
running diagnostics.

Note: The system does not report problems while the service agent is locked out.
When you complete your service action, be sure to unlock the service agent to
allow it to report problems.

Use the following procedure to lock out the service agent:

1. Click the Administration folder.
2. Select the Lockout Machines option.
3. In the Detail screen, select the system you want to lock out, then click Lock.
4. To verify that the system is locked out, click the Network folder.
5. Click the Padlock icon to display the lockout status. The system you locked out
should have a red X displayed, indicating it is locked out.

Use the following procedure to unlock the service agent:

1. Click the Administration folder.
2. Select the Lockout Machines option.
3. In the Detail screen, select the system you want to unlock, and click Unlock.
4. To verify that the system is unlocked, click the Network folder.
5. Click the Padlock icon to display the lockout status. The system you unlocked
should not have a red X displayed.

Running Online Diagnostics

Consider the following when you run the Online Diagnostics from a server or a disk:
v The diagnostics cannot be loaded and run from a disk until the AIX operating system
has been installed and configured. After the installation of the AIX operating system,
all three modes of operation are available.
v The diagnostics cannot be loaded on a system (client) from a server if that system is
not set up to IPL from a server over a network, or the server has not been setup to
send a service mode IPL of the diagnostics. When the system is set up to IPL from a
server, the diagnostics are executed in the same manner as they are from disk.

96 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v If the diagnostics were loaded from disk or a server, you must shut down the AIX
operating system before powering off the system unit to prevent possible damage to
disk data. This is done in one of two ways:
– If the diagnostic programs were loaded in Standalone mode, press the F3 key
until DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS displays; then follow the
displayed instructions to shut down the AIX operating system.
– If the diagnostic programs were loaded in maintenance or concurrent mode, enter
the shutdown -F command.
v Under some conditions the system may stop, with instructions displayed on attached
displays and terminals. Follow the instructions to select a console display.

Running the Diagnostics from a TTY Terminal

Consider the following when you run diagnostics using a TTY-type terminal as the
console display:
v See the operator manual for your type of TTY terminal to find the key sequences you
need to respond to the diagnostics. For the 3151, refer to the 3151 ASCII Display
Station Guide to Operations, form number GA18-2633. For the 3164, refer to the
3164 ASCII Color Display Station Description, form number GA18-2617.
v When the diagnostics present display information through the S1 serial port, certain
attributes are used. These attributes are set as if the diagnostics were using a 3161
display terminal. Refer to the tables in Appendix C, “General Attributes Required
When Using a TTY Terminal” on page 173 for a list of attributes for the 3161 ASCII
Display Terminal and for two other ASCII display terminals commonly used with the
system.
v If you have a TTY terminal other than a 3151, 3161 or 3164 attached to the S1 serial
port, your terminal may have different names for the attributes. Refer to the tables in
Appendix C, “General Attributes Required When Using a TTY Terminal” on page 173,
and use the attribute descriptions to determine the settings for your terminal.

Online Diagnostics Mode of Operation

The Online diagnostics can be run in three modes:
v Service Mode allows checking of most system resources.
v Concurrent Mode allows the normal system functions to continue while selected
resources are being checked.
v Maintenance Mode allows checking of most system resources

Running the Online Diagnostics in Service Mode (Service Mode IPL)

Service mode provides the most complete checkout of the system resources. This
mode also requires that no other programs be running on the system. All supported
system resources except the SCSI adapter, and the disk drives used for paging can be
tested. However, the system memory and the processor are only tested during
power-on self-test (POST).

Error log analysis is done in service mode when you select the Problem
Determination option on the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu.

Chapter 5. Using the Standalone and Online Diagnostics 97

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

To run the Online diagnostics in service mode, use the following steps:
1. Stop all programs including the AIX operating system (get help if needed).
2. Remove all tapes, diskettes, and CD-ROM discs.
3. Turn off the system unit power.
4. Turn on the system unit power.
5. After the first POST indicator appears on the system unit’s console, press F6 on
the directly-attached keyboard or 6 on the TTY keyboard to indicate that
diagnostics are to load.

Note: The term POST indicator refers to the icons (graphic display) or device
mnemonics (ASCII terminal) that are displayed while the POST is running.
6. Enter any requested password.
7. Follow any instructions to select a console.
8. After the diagnostic controller loads, DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
appear on the console display.
9. Follow the displayed instructions to test the desired resources.
10. When testing is complete; use the F3 key to return to the DIAGNOSTIC
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.
11. Press the F3 key (from a defined terminal) or press 99 (for an undefined terminal)
to shut down the diagnostics before turning off the system unit.

Note: Pressing the F3 key (from a defined terminal) produces a Confirm Exit
menu which offers two options: continuing with the shut down by pressing
F3; or returning to diagnostics by pressing Enter.

For undefined terminals, pressing 99 produces a full screen menu which

offers two options: continuing with the shutdown by pressing 99 and then
Enter; or returning to diagnostics by pressing Enter.

Running the Online Diagnostics in Concurrent Mode

Use Concurrent mode to run Online diagnostics on some of the system resources while
the system is running normal system activity.

Because the system is running in normal operation, the following resources cannot be
tested in concurrent mode:
v SCSI adapters connected to paging devices
v Disk drive used for paging
v Any graphics-related device running X, CDE, or windowing environment
v Memory
v Processor.

Three levels of testing exist in concurrent mode:

v The share-test level tests a resource while the resource is being shared by
programs running in the normal operation. This testing is mostly limited to normal
commands that test for the presence of a device or adapter.

98 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v The sub-test level tests a portion of a resource while the remaining part of the
resource is being used in normal operation. For example, this test could test one port
of a multiport device while the other ports are being used in normal operation.
v The full-test level requires the device not be assigned to or used by any other
operation. This level of testing on a disk drive might require the use of the varyoff
command. The diagnostics display menus to allow you to vary off the needed
resource.

Error log analysis is done in concurrent mode when you select the Problem
Determination option on the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu.

To run the Online diagnostics in concurrent mode you must be logged onto the AIX
operating system and have proper authority to issue the commands (if needed, get
help).

The diag command loads the diagnostic controller and displays the Online diagnostic
menus.

To run Online diagnostics in concurrent mode, use the following steps:

v Log on to the AIX operating system as root or use CE login.
v Enter the diag command.
v When the DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS display, follow the
instructions to test the desired resources.
v When testing is complete, use the F3 key to return to the DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS. Press the F3 key again to return to the operating system prompt.
Be sure to vary on any resource you had varied to off.
v Press the Ctrl-D key sequence to log off from root or superuser.

Running the Online Diagnostics in Maintenance Mode

Maintenance mode runs the Online diagnostics using the customer’s version of the AIX
operating system. This mode requires that all activity on the operating system be
stopped so the Online diagnostics have most of the resources available to check. All of
the system resources except the SCSI adapters, memory, processor, and the disk drive
used for paging can be checked.

Error log analysis is done in maintenance mode when you select the Problem
Determination option on the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu.

The shutdown -m command is used to stop all activity on the AIX operating system
and put the operating system into maintenance mode. The diag command is then used
to invoke the diagnostic controller so you can run the diagnostics. After the diagnostic
controller is loaded, follow the normal diagnostic instructions.

To run the Online diagnostics in maintenance mode, you must be logged in to the
customer’s version of the AIX operating system as root or superuser and use the
shutdown -m and diag commands. Use the following steps to run the Online
diagnostics in maintenance mode:

Chapter 5. Using the Standalone and Online Diagnostics 99

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

1. Stop all programs except the AIX operating system (get help if needed).
2. Log in to the AIX operating system as root or superuser.
3. Enter the shutdown -m command.
4. When a message indicates the system is in maintenance mode, enter the diag
command.

Note: It may be necessary to set TERM type again.

5. When DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS display, follow the displayed
instructions to test the desired resources.
6. When testing is complete, use the F3 key to return to DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS. Then press the F3 key again to return to the AIX operating
system prompt.
7. Press Ctrl-D to log off from root or superuser.

Running System Verification When Connected to an Hardware Management

Console (HMC)
Run the following procedure only if you are connected to an HMC.

Step 1. Running Online Diagnostics in Service Mode

To run the online diagnostics in service mode from the boot hard disk, do the following:
1. From the HMC select the Partition Manager.
2. Right-click on the mouse and select Open Terminal Window
3. From the Service Processor Menu on the VTERM, select Option 2 System Power
Control.
4. Select option 6. Verify that the state changes to currently disabled. Disabling
fast system boot automatically enables slow boot.
5. Select Option 98 to exit the system power control menu.
6. Use the HMC to power on the managed system in a full system partition by
selecting the managed system in the Contents area.
7. Right click or select the desired system in the Contents area. Next, on the menu,
choose Selected.
8. Select Power On.
9. Select the Power on Diagnostic Stored Boot list option (refer to Full System
Management Tasks in the, order number, for more information on full system
partitions).
10. Make sure that there are no media in the devices in the media subsystem.
11. Enter any passwords, if requested.

Note: If you are unable to load the diagnostics to the point when the DIAGNOSTIC
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS display, call your support center for assistance.

100 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Step 2. Running the Verification Procedure

When the Diagnostic Operating Instructions display, do the following to run system
verification:
1. Press Enter.
2. If the terminal type has not been defined, you must use the Initialize Terminal
option on the Function Selection menu to initialize the operating system
environment before you can continue with the diagnostics.
3. If you want to do a general checkout, with minimal operator action, select the
Diagnostic Routines option on the Function Selection menu.
If you want to do a more complete checkout, including the use of wrap plugs, select
the Advanced Diagnostics option on the Function Selection menu. The advanced
diagnostics are primarily for the service representative; the diagnostics may instruct
you to install wrap plugs to better isolate a problem.
4. Select the System Verification option on the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu.
5. If you want to run a general checkout of all installed resources, select the All
Resource option on the Diagnostic Selection menu.
If you want to check one particular resource, select that resource on the Diagnostic
Selection menu.

The checkout programs end with either of the following results:

v The Testing Complete menu displays with a message stating No trouble was found.
v The A Problem Was Detected On (Time Stamp) menu displays, with either a service
request number (SRN) or an error code. Make a note of any codes displayed on the
display or operator panel.

Step 3. Performing Additional System Verification

To perform additional system verification, do the following:
1. Press Enter to return to the Diagnostic Selection menu.
2. To check other resources, select the resource. When you have checked all of the
resources you need to check, go to “Step 4. Stopping the Diagnostics”.

Step 4. Stopping the Diagnostics

To stop the diagnostics, do the following:
1. To exit the diagnostics, press the F3 key (from a defined terminal) or press 99 (from
an undefined terminal).
2. If you changed any attributes on your ASCII terminal to run the diagnostics, change
the settings back to normal.
3. This completes the system verification. If you received an error code, record the
code and report it to the service organization.

If the system passed all the diagnostic tests, the verification process is complete and
your system is ready to use.

Chapter 5. Using the Standalone and Online Diagnostics 101

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Standalone Diagnostic Operation

Use Standalone Diagnostics to test the system when the Online Diagnostics are not
installed and as a method of testing the disk drives and other resources that can not be
tested by the Online Diagnostics.

Note: Error Log Analysis is not done by the Standalone Diagnostics. If running from the
diagnostic CD-ROM disc, the CD-ROM drive and the SCSI controller that
controls it cannot be tested by the Standalone Diagnostics.

Running the Standalone Diagnostics

To run Standalone Diagnostics in service mode, use the following steps:
1. Stop all programs including the AIX operating system (get help if needed).
2. Remove all tapes, diskettes, and CD-ROMs.
3. Turn off the system unit power.
4. Turn on the system unit power.
5. Insert the diagnostic media.
6. When the keyboard POST indicator appears, press the F5 key on the directly
attached keyboard, or the number 5 key on the TTY keyboard.
7. Enter any requested passwords.
8. Follow any instructions to select the console.
9. After the diagnostic controller loads, DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
appear on the console display.
10. Follow the displayed instructions to test the desired resources.
11. When testing is complete, use the F3 key to return to the DIAGNOSTIC
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.

102 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids

The AIX Diagnostic Package contains programs that are called Tasks. Tasks can be
thought of as performing a specific function on a resource; for example, running
diagnostics or performing a service aid on a resource. This chapter describes the Tasks
available in AIX Diagnostics Version 4.2 and later.

Normally, one would run certify if after running diagnostics on a drive and its media, no
problem is found, but one still suspects that a problem still does exist.

Note: Many of these programs work on all system model architectures. Some
programs are only accessible from Online Diagnostics in Service or Concurrent
mode, while others might be accessible only from Standalone Diagnostics. Still
other programs might only be supported on a particular system architecture,
such as CHRP (Common Hardware Reference Platform) or RSPC (PowerPC
Reference Platform). Refer to to identify the platform type of your system unit.

To perform one of these tasks, use the Task Selection option from the FUNCTION
SELECTION menu.

After a task is selected, a resource menu may be presented showing all resources
supported by the task.

A fast path method is also available to perform a task by using the diag command and
the -T flag. By using the fast path, the user can bypass most of the introductory menus
to access a particular task. The user is presented with a list of resources available to
support the specified task. The fast path tasks are as follows:
v Certify - Certifies media
v Chkspares - Checks for the availability of spare sectors
v Download - Downloads microcode to an adapter or device
v Disp_mcode - Displays current level of microcode
v Format - Formats media
v Identify - Identifies the PCI RAID physical disks
v IdentifyRemove - Identifies and removes devices (Hot Plug)

To run these tasks directly from the command line, specify the resource and other
task-unique flags. Use the descriptions in this chapter to understand which flags are
needed for a given task.

Tasks
The following tasks are described in this chapter:
v Add Resource to Resource List
v AIX Shell Prompt
v Analyze Adapter Internal Log
v Backup and Restore Media
v Certify Media
v Change Hardware Vital Product Data

103
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v Configure Dials and LPF Keys

v Configure ISA Adapters
v Configure Reboot Policy
v Configure Remote Maintenance Policy
v Configure Ring Indicate Power On
v Configure Ring Indicate Power-On Policy
v Configure Service Processor (RSPC)
v Configure Surveillance Policy
v Create Customized Configuration Diskette
v Delete Resource from Resource List
v Disk Maintenance
v Display Configuration and Resource List
v Display Firmware Device Node Information
v Display Hardware Error Report
v Display Hardware Vital Product Data
v Display Machine Check Error Log
v Display Microcode Level
v Display or Change Bootlist
v Display or Change Diagnostic Run Time Options
v Display Previous Diagnostic Results
v Display Resource Attributes
v Display Service Hints
v Display Software Product Data
v Display System Environmental Sensors
v Display Test Patterns
v Display USB Devices
v Download Microcode
v Fibre Channel RAID Service Aids
v Flash SK-NET FDDI Firmware
v Format Media
v Gather System Information
v Generic Microcode Download
v Hot Plug Task
v Local Area Network Analyzer
v Log Repair Action
v Periodic Diagnostics
v PCI RAID Physical Disk Identify
v Process Supplemental Media
v Run Diagnostics
v Run Error Log Analysis
v Run Exercisers
v Save or Restore Hardware Management Policies
v Save or Restore Service Processor Configuration
v SCSI Bus Analyzer
v SCSD Tape Drive Service Aid
v Spare Sector Availability
v SSA Service Aid
v System Fault Indicator
v System Identify Indicator
v Update Disk-Based Diagnostics

104 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v Update System or Service Processor Flash

v Update System Flash
v 7135 RAIDiant Array Service Aids
v 7318 Serial Communication Network Server

Add Resource to Resource List

Use this task to add resources back to the resource list.

Note: Only resources that were previously detected by the diagnostics and deleted
from the Diagnostic Test List are listed. If no resources are available to be
added, then none are listed.

AIX Shell Prompt

Note: Use this service aid in Online Service Mode only.

This service aid allows access to the AIX command line. To use this service aid, the
user must know the root password (when a root password has been established).

Note: Do not use this task to install code or to change the configuration of the system.
This task is intended to view files, configuration records, and data. Using this
service aid to change the system configuration or install code can produce
unexplained system problems after exiting the diagnostics.

Analyze Adapter Internal Log

The PCI RAID adapter has an internal log that logs information about the adapter and
the disk drives attached to the adapter. Whenever data is logged in the internal log, the
device driver copies the entries to the AIX system error log and clears the internal log.

The Analyze Adapter Internal Log service aid analyzes these entries in the AIX system
error log. The service aid displays the errors and the associated service actions. Entries
that do not require any service actions are ignored.

When running this service aid, a menu is presented to enter the start time, the end
time, and the filename. The start time and end time have the following format:
[mmddHHMMyy]. (where mm is the month (1-12), dd is the date (1-31) HH is the hour
(00-23) MM is the minute (00-59), and yy is the last two digits of the year (00-99). The
filename is the location where the user wants to store the output data.

To invoke the service aid task from the command Line Interface:

diag -c -d devicename -T "adapela [-s start date -e end date]

Flag Description
-c Specifies not console mode.

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 105

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Flag Description
-d devicename Specifies the device whose internal log you
want to analyze (for example, SCRAID0)
-s start date Specifies all errors after this date are analyzed.
-e end date Specifies all errors before this date are
analyzed.
-T Specifies the Analyze Adapter Internal Log task

Note: To specify a filename from the command line, use the redirection operator at the
end of the command to specify where you would like the output of the command
to be sent, for example > filename (where filename is the name and location
where the user wants to store the output data (for example, /tmp/adaptlog).

Backup and Restore Media

This service aid allows verification of backup media and devices. It presents a menu of
tape and diskette devices available for testing and prompts for selecting the desired
device. It then presents a menu of available backup formats and prompts for selecting
the desired format. The supported formats are tar, backup, and cpio. After the device
and format are selected, the service aid backs up a known file to the selected device,
restores that file to /tmp, and compares the original file to the restored file. The restored
file remains in /tmp to allow for visual comparison. All errors are reported.

106 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Certify Media
This task allows the selection of diskette, DVD-RAM media or hard files to be certified.
Normally, this is done for the following two conditions:
v To determine the condition of the drive and media.
v To verify that the media is error free after a Format Service Aid has been run on the
media.

Normally, one would run certify if after running diagnostics on a drive and its media, no
problem is found, but one still suspects that a problem still does exist.

Hard files can be connected either to a SCSI adapter (non-RAID) or a PCI SCSI RAID
adapter. The usage and criteria for a hard file connected to a non-RAID SCSI adapter
are different from those for a hard file connected to a PCI SCSI RAID adapter.

Certify may be used in the following ways:

v Certify Diskette
This selection enables you to verify the data written on a diskette. When you select
this service aid, a menu asks you to select the type of diskette being verified. The
program then reads all of the ID and data fields on the diskette one time and
displays the total number of bad sectors found.
v Certify DVD-RAM media
This selection reads all of the ID and data fields. It checks for bad data and counts
all errors encountered. If an unrecovered error occurs, or recovered errors exceed
the threshold value, the data on the media should be transferred to other media and
the original media should be discarded.
The Certify service aid will display the following information:
– Capacity in bytes
– Number of Data Errors Not Recovered
– Number of Equipment Check Errors
– Number of Recovered Errors

If the drive is reset during a certify operation, the operation is restarted.

If the drive is reset again, the certify operation is terminated and the user is asked to
run diagnostics on the drive.
This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the following command
syntax: diag -c -d -T certify
Flag Description
-c No console mode
-d Specifies a device
-T Specifies the certify task
v Certify Hardfile Attached to a Non-RAID SCSI Adapter
This selection reads all of the ID and data fields. It checks for bad data and counts
all errors encountered. If there are unrecovered data errors that do not exceed the
threshold value, then the hard file needs to be formatted and certified. If the

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 107

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

unrecovered data errors, recovered data errors, recovered and unrecovered

equipment errors exceed the threshold values, the disk needs to be replaced.
It also makes 2000 random seeks after the read certify of the surface completes. If a
disk timeouts before finishing the random seeks, then the disk needs to be replaced.
The random seeks also count all errors encountered.
The Certify service aid will display the following information:
– Drive capacity in megabytes.
– Number of Data Errors Recovered.
– Number of Data Errors Not Recovered.
– Number of Equipment Checks Recovered.
– Number of Equipment Checks Not Recovered.

This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the following command
syntax: diag -c -d deviceName -T "certify"
Flag Description
-c No console mode
-d Specifies a device
-T Specifies the certify task
v Format and/or Erase Hardfile Attached to a Non-RAID SCSI Adapter
Warning: The following commands WILL change the content of the hardfile. Be sure
to backup data prior to running the command, and take care in choosing the hardfile
upon which you run this task.
– Hardfile Format
Writes all of the disk. The pattern written on the disk is device-dependant; for
example, some drives may write all 0s, while some may write the hexadecimal
number 5F. No bad block reassignment occurs.
– Hardfile Format and Certify
Performs the same function as Hardfile Format. After the format is completed,
Certify is run. Certify then reassigns all bad blocks encountered.
– Hardfile Erase Disk
This option can be used to overwrite (remove) all data currently stored in
user-accessible blocks of the disk. The Erase Disk option writes one or more
patterns to the disk. An additional option allows data in a selectable block to be
read and displayed on the system console.
To use the Erase Disk option, specify the number (0-3) of patterns to be written.
The patterns are written serially; that is, the first pattern is written to all blocks.
Then the next pattern is written to all blocks, overlaying the previous pattern. A
random pattern is written by selecting the Write Random Pattern option.

Note: The Erase Disk service aid has not been certified as meeting the
Department of Defense or any other organization’s security guidelines.

Use the following steps to overwrite the data on the drive:

1. Use the Erase Disk selection to overwrite the data on the drive.

108 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

2. Do a format without certify.

3. Run a second pass of the Erase Disk selection.

For a newly installed drive, you can ensure that all blocks on the drive are
overwritten with your pattern if you use the following procedure:
1. Format the drive.
2. Check the defect MAP by running the Erase Disk selection.

Note: If you use Format and Certify option, there may be some blocks which
get placed into the grown defect MAP.
3. If there are bad blocks in the defect MAP, record the information presented
and ensure that this information is kept with the drive. This data is used later
when the drive is to be overwritten.
4. Use you drive as you would normally.
5. When the drive is no longer needed and is to be erased, run the same version
of the Erase Disk selection which was used in step 2.

Note: Using the same version of the service aid is only critical if any bad
blocks were found in step 3.
6. Compare the bad blocks which were recorded for the drive in step 3 with
those that now appear in the grown defect MAP.

Note: If there are differences between the saved data and the newly obtained
data, then all sectors on this drive cannot be overwritten. The new bad
blocks are not overwritten.
7. If the bad block list is the same, continue running the service aid to overwrite
the disk with the chosen pattern(s).

This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the command
syntax: diag -c -d deviceName -T "format [-s* fmtcert | erase -a {read |
write}] [-F]*
Flag Description
fmtcert Formats and certifies the disk.
erase Overwrites the data on the disk.
* Available in no-console mode only.
-F Force the disk erasure even if all blocks cannot be erased due to errors
accessing the grown defect map.

Note: The Erase Disk option in command line mode uses default values. To
selectively read or write, use the diag command in console mode.
v Certify Hardfile attached to a PCI SCSI RAID Adapter
This selection is used to certify physical disks attached to a PCI SCSI RAID adapter.
Certify reads the entire disk and checks for recovered errors, unrecovered errors,
and reassigned errors. If these errors exceed the threshold values, the user is
prompted to replace the physical disk.

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 109

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the following command
syntax: diag -c -d RAIDadapterName -T "certify {-l chID | -A}"
Flag Description
-c No console mode
-d Specifies the RAID adapter to which the disk is attached
-T Specifies the certify task and its parameters
-I Specifies physical Disk channel/ID (example: -l 27)
-A All disks

Change Hardware Vital Product Data

Use this service aid to display the Display/Alter VPD Selection Menu. The menu lists all
resources installed on the system. When a resource is selected, a menu displays that
lists all the VPD for that resource.

Note: The user cannot alter the VPD for a specific resource unless it is not
machine-readable.

110 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Configure Dials and LPF Keys

Note: The Dials and LPF Keys service aid is not supported in standalone mode
(CD-ROM and NIM) on systems with 32 MB or less memory. If you have
problems in standalone mode, use the hardfile-based diagnostics.

This service aid provides a tool for configuring and removing dials and LPF keys to the
asynchronous serial ports.

This selection invokes the SMIT utility to allow Dials and LPF keys configuration. A TTY
must be in the available state on the async port before the Dials and LPF keys can be
configured on the port. The task allows an async adapter to be configured, then a TTY
port defined on the adapter. Dials and LPF keys can then be defined on the port.

Before configuring Dials or LPF keys on a serial port, you must remove all defined
TTYs. To determine if there are any defined TTYs, select List All Defined TTYs. Once
all defined TTYs have been removed, then add a new TTY and configure the Dials or
LPF keys.

Configure ISA Adapter

This task uses SMIT to identify and configure ISA adapters on systems that have an
ISA bus and adapters.

Diagnostic support for ISA adapters not shown in the list may be supported from a
supplemental diskette. You can use the Process Supplemental Media task to add ISA
adapter support from a supplemental diskette.

Whenever an ISA adapter is installed, this service aid must be run and the adapter
configured before the adapter can be tested. You must also run this service aid to
remove an ISA adapter from the system whenever an ISA adapter is physically
removed from the system.

If diagnostics are run on an ISA adapter that has been removed from the system, the
diagnostics fail because the system cannot detect the ISA adapter.

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 111

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Configure Reboot Policy

Note: This service aid runs on CHRP system units only.

This service aid controls how the system tries to recover from a system crash.

Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the Reboot Policy.

Note: Because of system capability, some of the following settings might not be
displayed by this service aid.
v Maximum Number of Reboot Attempts
Enter a number that is 0 or greater.

Note: A value of 0 indicates ’do not attempt to reboot’ to a crashed system.

This number is the maximum number of consecutive attempts to reboot the system.
The term reboot, in the context of this service aid, is used to describe bringing
system hardware back up from scratch; for example, from a system reset or
power-on.

When the reboot process completes successfully, the reboot attempts count is reset
to 0, and a restart begins. The term restart, in the context of this service aid, is used
to describe the operating system activation process. Restart always follows a
successful reboot.

When a restart fails, and a restart policy is enabled, the system attempts to reboot
for the maximum number of attempts.
v Use the O/S Defined Restart Policy (1=Yes, 0=No)
When ’Use the O/S Defined Restart Policy’ is set to Yes, the system attempts to
reboot from a crash if the operating system has an enabled Defined Restart or
Reboot Policy.
When ’Use the O/S Defined Restart Policy’ is set to No, or the operating system
restart policy is undefined, then the restart policy is determined by the ’Supplemental
Restart Policy’.
v Enable Supplemental Restart Policy (1=Yes, 0=No)
The ’Supplemental Restart Policy’, if enabled, is used when the O/S Defined Restart
Policy is undefined, or is set to False.
When surveillance detects operating system inactivity during restart, an enabled
’Supplemental Restart Policy’ causes a system reset and the reboot process begins.
v Call-Out Before Restart (on/off)
When enabled, Call-Out Before Restart allows the system to call out (on a serial port
that is enabled for call-out) when an operating system restart is initiated. Such calls
can be valuable if the number of these events becomes excessive, thus signalling
bigger problems.
v Enable Unattended Start Mode (1=Yes, 0=No)

112 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

When enabled, ’Unattended Start Mode’ allows the system to recover from the loss
of ac power.
If the system was powered-on when the ac loss occurred, the system reboots when
power is restored. If the system was powered-off when the ac loss occurred, the
system remains off when power is restored.

You can access this service aid directly from the AIX command line, by typing:
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -b

Configure Remote Maintenance Policy

Note: This service aid runs on CHRP system units only.

The Remote Maintenance Policy includes modem configurations and phone numbers to
use for remote maintenance support.

Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the Remote
Maintenance Policy.

Note: Because of system capability, some of the following settings might not be
displayed by this service aid.
v Configuration File for Modem on serial port 1 (S1) Configuration File for Modem on
serial port 2 (S2).
Enter the name of a modem configuration file to load on either S1 or S2. The modem
configuration files are located in the directory /usr/share/modems. If a modem file is
already loaded, it is indicated by Modem file currently loaded.
v Modem file currently loaded on S1 Modem file currently loaded on S2
This is the name of the file that is currently loaded on serial port 1 or serial port 2.

Note: These settings are only shown when a modem file is loaded for a serial port.
v Call In Authorized on S1 (on/off) Call In Authorized on S2 (on/off)
Call In allows the Service Processor to receive a call from a remote terminal.
v Call Out Authorized on S1 (on/off) Call Out Authorized on S2 (on/off)
Call Out allows the Service Processor to place calls for maintenance.
v S1 Line Speed S2 Line Speed
A list of line speeds is available by using List on the screen.
v Service Center Phone Number
This is the number of the service center computer. The service center usually
includes a computer that takes calls from systems with call-out capability. This
computer is referred to as ″the catcher.″ The catcher expects messages in a specific
format to which the Service Processor conforms. For more information about the
format and catcher computers, refer to the README file in the AIX
/usr/samples/syscatch directory. Contact the service provider for the correct
telephone number to enter here.
v Customer Administration Center Phone Number

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 113

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

This is the number of the System Administration Center computer (catcher) that
receives problem calls from systems. Contact the system administrator for the correct
telephone number to enter here.
v Digital Pager Phone Number In Event of Emergency
This is the number for a pager carried by someone who responds to problem calls
from your system.
v Customer Voice Phone Number
This is the number for a telephone near the system, or answered by someone
responsible for the system. This is the telephone number left on the pager for
callback.
v Customer System Phone Number
This is the number to which your system’s modem is connected. The service or
administration center representatives need this number to make direct contact with
your system for problem investigation. This is also referred to as the Call In phone
number.
v Customer Account Number
This number is available for service providers to use for record-keeping and billing.
v Call Out Policy Numbers to call if failure
This is set to either First or All. If the call-out policy is set to First, call out stops at
the first successful call to one of the following numbers in the order listed:
1. Service Center
2. Customer Administration Center
3. Pager
If Call Out Policy is set to All, call-out attempts to call all of the following numbers in
the order listed:
1. Service Center
2. Customer Administration Center
3. Pager
v Customer RETAIN Login ID Customer RETAIN Login Password
These settings apply to the RETAIN service function.
v Remote Timeout, in seconds Remote Latency, in seconds
These settings are functions of the service provider’s catcher computer.
v Number of Retries While Busy
This is the number of times the system should retry calls that resulted in busy
signals.
v System Name (System Administrator Aid)
This is the name given to the system and is used when reporting problem messages.

Note: Knowing the system name aids the support team in quickly identifying the
location, configuration, history, and so on of your system.

You can access this service aid directly from the AIX command line, by typing:
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -m

114 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Configure Ring Indicate Power-On Policy

Note: This service aid runs on CHRP system units only.

This service aid allows the user to power-on a system by telephone from a remote
location. If the system is powered off, and Ring Indicate Power On is enabled, the
system powers on at a predetermined number of rings. If the system is already on, no
action is taken. In either case, the telephone call is not answered, and the caller
receives no feedback that the system has powered on.

Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the Ring Indicate
Power-On Policy:

Note: Because of system capability, some of the following settings might not be
displayed by this service aid.
v Power On Via Ring Indicate (on/off)
v Number of Rings Before Power On

You can access this service aid directly from the AIX command line, by typing:
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -r

Configure Ring Indicate Power On

Note: This service aid runs on RSPC system units only.

This service aid allows the user to display and change the NVRAM settings for the Ring
Indicate Power On capability of the service processor.

The settings allows the user to:

v Enable or disable power-on from Ring Indicate
v Read or set the number of rings before power-on

Configure Service Processor

Note: This service aid runs on RSPC system units only.

This service aid allows you to display and change the NVRAM settings for the service
processor.

This service aid supports the following functions:

v Surveillance Setup
v Modem Configuration
v Call in or call out Setup
v Site specific call in or call out setup
v Reboot or restart policy setup

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 115

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Surveillance Setup
Note: Surveillance is only supported for systems running in full machine partition.

This selection allows you to display and change the NVRAM settings for the
surveillance capability of the service processor.

The settings allow you to:

v Enable or disable surveillance
v Set the surveillance time interval, in minutes
v Set the surveillance delay, in minutes

The current settings are read from NVRAM and displayed on the screen. Any changes
made to the data shown are written to NVRAM.

Modem Configuration
Use this selection when setting the NVRAM for a modem attached to any of the Service
Processor’s serial ports. The user inputs the file name of a modem configuration file
and the serial port number. The formatted modem configuration file is read, converted
for NVRAM, and then loaded into NVRAM. Refer to the Service Processor Installation
and User’s Guide for more information.

Call In/Out Setup

This selection allows the user to display and change the NVRAM settings for the Call
In/Call Out capability of the service processor.

The settings allow the user to:

v Enable or disable call in on either serial port
v Enable or disable call out on either serial port
v Set the line speed on either serial port

Site Specific Call In/Out Setup

This selection allows you to display and change the NVRAM settings that are
site-specific for the call-in or call-out capability of the service processor.

The site-specific NVRAM settings allow you to set the following:

v Phone number for the service center
v Phone number for the customer administration center
v Phone number for a digital pager
v Phone number for the customer system to call in
v Phone number for the customer voice phone
v Customer account number
v Call-out policy
v Customer RETAIN ID
v Customer RETAIN password
v Remote timeout value
v Remote latency value
v Number of retries while busy
v System name

116 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

The current settings are read from NVRAM and displayed on the screen. Any changes
made to the data shown are written to NVRAM.

Reboot/Restart Policy Setup

This selection controls how the system tries to recover from a system crash.

Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the Reboot Policy
Setup.
v Maximum Number of Reboot Attempts
Enter a number that is 0 or greater.

Note: A value of 0 indicates ″do not attempt to reboot″ to a crashed system.

This number is the maximum number of consecutive attempts allowed to reboot the
system. The term reboot, when used in context of this service aid, describes the
system hardware being brought back up from scratch. Examples would be a system
reset or turning on the power.

When the maximum number of reboot attempts is exceeded, the system calls out if
that function has been enabled.

When the reboot process completes successfully, the reboot-attempts count is reset
to 0, and a restart begins. The term restart, when used in context of this service aid,
describes the operating system activation process. Restart always follows a
successful reboot.

When a restart fails, and a restart policy is enabled, the system attempts to reboot
for the maximum number of reboot attempts.
v Enable Restart Policy (1=Yes, 0=No)
When the service processor detects operating system inactivity, an enabled ″Restart
Policy″ causes a system reset, and the reboot process begins.
v Call-Out Before Restart (on/off)
When enabled, ″Call-Out Before Restart″ allows the system to call out (on a serial
port that is enabled for call-out) when an operating system restart is initiated. Such
call-outs can be valuable if the number becomes excessive, thus signalling bigger
problems.
v Enable Unattended Start Mode (1=Yes, 0=No)
When enabled, ″Unattended Start Mode″ allows the system to recover from the loss
of ac power.
If the system was powered-on when the ac loss occurred, the system reboots when
power is restored. If the system was powered-off when the ac loss occurred, the
system remains off when power is restored.

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 117

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Configure Surveillance Policy

Note: This service aid runs on CHRP system units only. This service aid is only
supported for systems running in full machine partition.

This service aid monitors the system for hang conditions; that is, hardware or software
failures that cause operating system inactivity. When enabled, and surveillance detects
operating system inactivity, a call is placed to report the failure.

Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the Surveillance
Policy:

Note: Because of system capability, some of the following settings might not be
displayed by this service aid:
v Surveillance (on/off)
v Surveillance Time Interval
This is the maximum time between heartbeats from the operating system.
v Surveillance Time Delay
This is the time to delay between when the operating system is in control and when
to begin operating system surveillance.
v Changes are to Take Effect Immediately
Set this to Yes if the changes made to the settings in this menu are to take place
immediately. Otherwise the changes take effect beginning with the next system boot.

You can access this service aid directly from the AIX command line, by typing:
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -s

Create Customized Configuration Diskette

This selection invokes the Diagnostic Package Utility Service Aid, which allows the user
to create a standalone diagnostic package configuration diskette.

The Standalone Diagnostic Package Configuration Diskette allows the following to be

changed from the console:
v Default refresh rate for a low function terminal (LFT)
The refresh rate used by the standalone diagnostic package is 60 Hz. If the display’s
refresh rate is 77 Hz, set the refresh rate to 77.
v Different async terminal console
You can create a console configuration file that allows a terminal attached to any
RS232 or RS422 adapter to be selected as a console device. The default device is
an RS232 TTY device attached to the first standard serial port (S1).

118 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Delete Resource from Resource List

Use this task to delete resources from the resource list.

Note: Only resources that were previously detected by the diagnostics and have not
been deleted from the Diagnostic Test List are listed. If no resources are
available to be deleted, then none are listed.

Disk Maintenance
This service aid provides the following options for the fixed-disk maintenance:
v Disk to Disk Copy
v Display/Alter Sector

Disk to Disk Copy

Notes:
1. This service aid cannot be used to update to a different size drive. The service aid
only supports copying from a SCSI drive to another SCSI drive of similar size.
2. Use the migratepv command when copying the contents to other disk drive types.
This command also works when copying SCSI disk drives or when copying to a
different size SCSI disk drive. Refer to System Management Guide: Operating
System and Devices for a procedure on migrating the contents of a physical
volume.
This publication is located on the AIX Documentation CD. The documentation
information is made accessible by loading the documentation CD onto the hard disk
or by mounting the CD in the CD-ROM drive.

This selection allows you to recover data from an old drive when replacing it with a new
drive. The service aid recovers all logical volume manager (LVM) software reassigned
blocks. To prevent corrupted data from being copied to the new drive, the service aid
stops if an unrecoverable read error is detected. To help prevent possible problems with
the new drive, the service aid stops if the number of bad blocks being reassigned
reaches a threshold.

To use this service aid, both the old and new disks must be installed in or attached to
the system with unique SCSI addresses. This requires that the new disk drive SCSI
address must be set to an address that is not currently in use and the drive be installed
in an empty location. If there are no empty locations, then one of the other drives must
be removed. When the copy is complete, only one drive can remain installed. Either
remove the target drive to return to the original configuration, or perform the following
procedure to complete the replacement of the old drive with the new drive:
1. Remove both drives.
2. Set the SCSI address of the new drive to the SCSI address of the old drive.
3. Install the new drive in the old drive’s location.
4. Install any other drives (that were removed) into their original location.

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 119

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

To prevent problems that can occur when running this service aid from disk, it is
suggested that this service aid be run, when possible, from the diagnostics that are
loaded from removable media.

Display/Alter Sector
Note: Use caution when you use this service aid because inappropriate modification to
some disk sectors can result in the total loss of all data on the disk.

This selection allows the user to display and alter information on a disk sector. Sectors
are addressed by their decimal sector number. Data is displayed both in hex and in
ASCII. To prevent corrupted data from being incorrectly corrected, the service aid does
not display information that cannot be read correctly.

Display Configuration and Resource List

If a device is not included in the Test List or if you think a Diagnostic Package for a
device is not loaded, check by using the Display Configuration and Resource List task.
If the device you want to test has a plus (+) sign or a minus (-) sign preceding its name,
the Diagnostic Package is loaded. If the device has an asterisk (*) preceding its name,
the Diagnostic Package for the device is not loaded or is not available.

This service aid displays the item header only for all installed resources. Use this
service aid when there is no need to see the vital product data (VPD). (No VPD is
displayed.)

Display Firmware Device Node Information

Note: This service aid runs on CHRP system units only.

This task displays the firmware device node information that appears on CHRP
platforms. This service aid is intended to gather more information about individual or
particular devices on the system. The format of the output data may differ depending on
which level of the AIX operating system is installed.

Display Hardware Error Report

This service aid uses the errpt command to view the hardware error log.

The Display Error Summary and Display Error Detail selection provide the same type of
report as the errpt command. The Display Error Analysis Summary and Display Error
Analysis Detail selection provide additional analysis.

120 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Display Hardware Vital Product Data

This service aid displays all installed resources, along with any VPD for those
resources. Use this service aid when you want to look at the VPD for a specific
resource.

Display Machine Check Error Log

Note: The Machine Check Error Log Service Aid is available only on Standalone
Diagnostics.

When a machine check occurs, information is collected and logged in an NVRAM error
log before the system unit shuts down. This information is logged in the AIX error log
and cleared from NVRAM when the system is rebooted from the hard disk, LAN, or
standalone media. When booting from Standalone Diagnostics, this service aid converts
the logged information into a readable format that can be used to isolate the problem.
When booting from the hard disk or LAN, the information can be viewed from the AIX
error log using the Hardware Error Report Service Aid. In either case, the information is
analyzed when the sysplanar0 diagnostics are running in Problem Determination
Mode.

Display Microcode Level

This task is used to display the microcode or firmware levels of currently installed
resources. When the sys0 resource is selected, the task displays the levels of both the
system firmware and service processor firmware. sys0 may not be available in all
cases.

You can display the current level of the microcode on an adapter, the system, or a
device by using the AIX diag command. See the following command syntax: diag -c
-d device -T "disp_mcode"
Flag Description
-c No console mode.
-d Used to specify a device.
-T Use the disp_mcode option to display microcode.

The AIX lsmcode command serves as a command line interface to the ″Display
Microcode Level″ task. For information on the lsmcode command, refer to the AIX
Commands Reference manual.

Display or Change Bootlist

This service aid allows the bootlist to be displayed, altered, or erased.

The system attempts to perform an IPL from the first device in the list. If the device is
not a valid IPL device or if the IPL fails, the system proceeds in turn to the other
devices in the list to attempt an IPL.

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 121

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Display or Change Diagnostic Run-Time Options

The Display or Change Diagnostic Run-Time Options task allows the diagnostic
run-time options to be set.

Note: The run-time options are used only when selecting the Run Diagnostic task.

The run-time options are:

v Display Diagnostic Mode Selection Menus
This option allows the user to turn on or off displaying the DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SELECTION MENU (the default is on).
v Run Tests Multiple Times
This option allows the user to turn on or off running the diagnostic in loop mode (the
default is off).

Note: This option is only displayed when you run the Online Diagnostics in Service
Mode.
v Include Advanced Diagnostics
This option allows the user to turn on or off including the Advanced Diagnostics (the
default is off).
v Include Error Log Analysis
This option allows the user to turn on or off including the Error Log Analysis (ELA)
(the default is off).
v Number of Days Used to Search Error Log
This option allows the user to select the number of days for which to search the AIX
error log for errors when running the Error Log Analysis. The default is seven days,
but it can be changed from one to sixty days.
v Display Progress Indicators
This option allows the user to turn on or off the progress indicators when running the
Diagnostic Applications. The progress indicators are in a popup box at the bottom of
the screen which indicate that the test being run (the default is on).
v Diagnostic Event Logging
This option allows the user to turn on or off logging information to the Diagnostic
Event Log (the default is on).
v Diagnostic Event Log File Size
This option allows the user to select the maximum size of the Diagnostic Event Log.
The default size for the Diagnostic Event Log is 100 KB. The size can be increased
in 100 KB increments to a maximum of 1 MB.

122 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Display Previous Diagnostic Results

Note: This service aid is not available when you load the diagnostics from a source
other than a hard disk drive or a network.

This service aid allows a service representative to display results from a previous
diagnostic session. When the Display Previous Diagnostic Results option is selected,
the user can view up to 25 no trouble found (NTF) and service request number (SRN)
results.

This service aid displays Diagnostic Event Log information. You can display the
Diagnostic Event Log in a short version or a long version. The Diagnostic Event Log
contains information about events logged by a diagnostic session.

This service aid displays the information in reverse chronological order. If more
information is available than can be displayed on one screen, use the Page Down and
Page Up keys to scroll through the information.

This information is not from the AIX operating system error log. This information is
stored in the /var/adm/ras directory.

You can run the command from the AIX command line by typing:
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/diagrpt [[-o] | [-s mmddyy] | [-a] | [-r]]
Flag Description
-o Displays the last diagnostic results file stored in the
/etc/lpp/diagnostics/data directory
-s mmddyy Displays all diagnostic result files logged since the date specified
-a Displays the long version of the Diagnostic Event Log
-r Displays the short version of the Diagnostic Event Log

Display Resource Attributes

This task displays the Customized Device Attributes associated with a selected
resource. This task is similar to running the lsattr -E -l resource command.

Display Service Hints

This service aid reads and displays the information in the CEREADME file from the
diagnostics media. This file contains information that is not contained in the publications
for this version of the diagnostics. The file also contains information about using this
particular version of diagnostics.

Use the arrow keys to scroll through the information in the file.

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 123

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Display Software Product Data

This task uses SMIT to display information about the installed software and provides
the following functions:
v List Installed Software
v List Applied but Not Committed Software Updates
v Show Software Installation History
v Show Fix (APAR) Installation Status
v List Fileset Requisites
v List Fileset Dependents
v List Files Included in a Fileset
v List File Owner by Fileset

Display System Environmental Sensors

Note: This service aid runs on CHRP system units only.

This service aid displays the environmental sensors implemented on a CHRP system.
The information displayed is the sensor name, physical location code, literal value of
the sensor status, and the literal value of the sensor reading.

The sensor status can be any one of the following:

v Normal - The sensor reading is within the normal operating range.
v Critical High - The sensor reading indicates a serious problem with the device. Run
diagnostics on sysplanar0 to determine what repair action is needed.
v Critical Low - The sensor reading indicates a serious problem with the device. Run
diagnostics on sysplanar0 to determine what repair action is needed.
v Warning High - The sensor reading indicates a problem with the device. This could
become a critical problem if action is not taken. Run diagnostics on sysplanar0 to
determine what repair action is needed.
v Warning Low - The sensor reading indicates a problem with the device. This could
become a critical problem if action is not taken. Run diagnostics on sysplanar0 to
determine what repair action is needed.
v Hardware Error - The sensor could not be read because of a hardware error. Run
diagnostics on sysplanar0 in problem-determination mode to determine what repair
action is needed.
v Hardware Busy - The system has repeatedly returned a busy indication, and a
reading is not available. Try the service aid again. If the problem continues, run
diagnostics on sysplanar0 in problem-determination mode to determine what repair
action is needed.

This service aid can also be run as a command. You can use the command to list the
sensors and their values in a text format, list the sensors and their values in numerical
format, or a specific sensor can be queried to return either the sensor status or sensor
value.

124 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Run the command by entering one of the following:

/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -l | -a /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -t
token -i index [-v]
Flag Description
-l List the sensors and their values in a text format.
-a List the sensors and their values in a numerical format. For each sensor, the
following numerical values are displayed as: token index status measured
value location code
-t token
Specifies the sensor token to query.
-i index
Specifies the sensor index to query.
-v Indicates to return the sensor measured value. The sensor status is returned
by default.

Examples
The following are examples from this command:
1. Display a list of the environmental sensors: /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -l

Sensor = Fan Speed

Status = Normal
Value = 2436 RPM
Location Code = F1
Sensor = Power Supply
Status = Normal
Value = Present and operational
Location Code = V1
Sensor = Power Supply
Status = Critical low
Value = Present and not operational
Location Code = V2
2. Display a list of the environmental sensors in a numerical list:
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -a

3 0 11 87 P1
9001 0 11 2345 F1
9004 0 11 2 V1
9004 1 9 2 V2
3. Return the status of sensor 9004, index 1: /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -t
9004 -i 1

9
4. Return the value of sensor 9004, index 1: /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -t
9004 -i 1 -v

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 125

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Display Test Patterns

This service aid provides a means of adjusting system display units by providing
displayable test patterns. The user works through a series of menus to select the
display type and test pattern. After the selections are made, the test pattern displays.

Display USB Devices

The following are the main functions of this service aid:
v Display a list of USB controllers on an adapter.
v Display a list of USB devices that are connected to the selected controller.

To run the USB devices service aid, go to the diagnostics ″TASKS SELECTION″ menu,
select ″Display USB Devices″. From the controller list that displayed on the screen,
select one of the items that begins with ″OHCDX″, where ″X″ is a number. A list of
devices attached to the controller displays.

Download Microcode
This service aid provides a way to copy microcode to an adapter or device. The service
aid presents a list of adapters and devices that use microcode. After the adapter or
device is selected, the service aid provides menus to guide you in checking the current
level and downloading the needed microcode.

This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the following sections for
instructions on downloading to a particular type adapter or device.

Download Microcode to PCI SCSI RAID Adapter

See the following command syntax for a PCI SCSI RAID Adapter:
diag -c -d RAIDadapterName -T "download [-B] [-D] [-P]"
Flag Description
-B Download boot block microcode (default to functional microcode)
-D Microcode is on diskette (default to /etc/microcode directory)
-P Download the previous level of microcode (default to latest level)

Download Microcode to Disk Drive Attached to a PCI SCSI RAID Adapter

See the following command syntax for a disk drive attached to a PCI SCSI RAID
Adapter:
diag -c -d RAIDadapterName -T "download {-l chID | -A} [-D] [-P]"
Flag Description
-A All disk drives
-D Microcode is on diskette (default to /etc/microcode directory)
-l RAID disk drive-physical disk channel/ID (example 27)
-P Download the previous level of microcode (default to latest level)

126 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Download Microcode to a PCI FC-AL Adapter

Microcode installation occurs while the adapter and attached drives are available for
use. It is recommended that a current backup be available and the installation be
scheduled during a non-peak production time period.

Note: If the source is diskette, the diskette must be in a backup format and the image
stored in the /etc/microcode directory.

See the following command syntax for a PCI FC-AL Adapter.

diag -c -d device_name -T "download [-s {/etc/microcode|diskette}] [-l
{latest|previous}] [-f]"
Flag Description
-c No console mode. Run without user interaction.
-d Device name is the name of the adapter.
-T Use the download option to download microcode.
-s Source of the new microcode image. Default is /etc/microcode.
-l Level of microcode to install. The default is latest.
-f Force the installation even if the current level of microcode is not on the
source.

Download Microcode to DVD-RAM Attached to a PCI SCSI Adapter

See the following command syntax for a DVD-RAM attached to a PCI SCSI Adapter:
diag [-c] -d cdX -T "download [-s {/etc/microcode|diskette}]
[-l {latest|previous}] [-f]"
Flag Description
-c No console mode. Run without user interaction
cdX Device selected, for example, cd0.
-s Source of the new microcode. The default is /etc/microcode.
-l Level of microcode image to be installed. Latest in default
-f Install the microcode on the device even if the current level is unavailable on
the source.

Download Microcode to Disk Attached to PCI SCSI Adapter

See following command syntax for a disk drive attached to a PCI SCSI adapter:
diag [-c] -d hdiskX -T "download [-s {/etc/microcode|diskette}]
[-l {latest|previous}] [-f]"
Flag Description
-c No console mode. Run without user interaction
-d hdiskX
Selected device, for example, hdisk0.
-T download
Download microcode task.
-s Source of the new microcode. The default is /etc/microcode.
-l Level of microcode image to be installed. Latest in default
-f Install the microcode on the device even if the current level is unavailable on
the source.

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 127

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Download Microcode to Other Devices

See the following command syntax:
diag -c -d device_name -T "download [-s diskette] [-l previous] [-F]"
Flag Description
-F Force the download microcode even if the current level is unavailable on the
source.
-l Microcode level. Latest is default.
-s Source of the new microcode. The default is /etc/microcode. Default source
device is disk.

Fibre Channel RAID Service Aids

The Fibre Channel RAID service aids contain the following functions:
Certify LUN
This selection reads and checks each block of data in the logical unit number
(LUN). If excessive errors are encountered, the user is notified.
You can run this task from the AIX command line. Use the following fastpath
command: diag -T "certify"
Certify Spare Physical Disk
This selection allows the user to certify (check integrity of the data) drives that
are designated as spares.
You can run this task from the AIX command line. Use the following fastpath
command: diag -T "certify"
Format Physical Disk
This selection is used to format a selected disk drive.
You can run this task from the AIX command line. Use the following fastpath
command: diag -T "format"
Array Controller Microcode Download
This selection allows the microcode on the Fibre Channel RAID controller to be
updated when required.
You can run this task from the AIX command line. Use the following fastpath
command: diag -T "download"
Physical Disk Microcode Download
This selection is used to update the microcode on any of the disk drives in the
array.
You can run this task from the AIX command line. Use the following fastpath
command: diag -T "download"
Update EEPROM
This selection is used to update the contents of the electronically erasable
programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) on a selected controller.
Replace Controller
Use this selection when it is necessary to replace a controller in the array.

128 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Flash SK-NET FDDI Firmware

This task allows the Flash firmware on the SysKonnect SK-NET FDDI adapter to be
updated.

Format Media
This task allows the selection of diskettes, hardfiles, or optical media to be formatted.
Each selection is described below.

Hardfile Attached to SCSI Adapter (non-RAID)

v Hardfile Format
Writes all of the disk. The pattern written on the disk is device-dependent; for
example some drives may write all 0s, while some may write the hexadecimal
number 5F. No bad block reassignment occurs
v Hardfile Format and Certify
Performs the same function as Hardfile Format. After the format is completed, Certify
is run. Certify then reassigns all bad blocks encountered.
v Hardfile Erase Disk
This option can be used to overwrite (remove) all data currently stored in
user-accessible blocks of the disk. The Erase Disk option writes one or more
patterns to the disk. An additional option allows data in a selectable block to be read
and displayed on the system console.
To use the Erase Disk option, specify the number (0-3) of patterns to be written. The
patterns are written serially; that is, the first pattern is written to all blocks. Then the
next pattern is written to all blocks, overlaying the previous pattern. A random pattern
is written by selecting the Write Random Pattern? option.

Note: The Erase Disk service aid has not been certified as meeting the Department
of Defense or any other organization’s security guidelines.

Use the following steps to overwrite the data on the drive:

1. Use the Erase Disk selection to overwrite the data on the drive.
2. Do a format without certify.
3. Run a second pass of the Erase Disk selection.
For a newly installed drive, you can ensure that all blocks on the drive are
overwritten with your pattern if you use the following procedure:
1. Format the drive.
2. Check the defect MAP by running the Erase Disk selection.

Note: If you use the Format and Certify option, there may be some blocks
which get placed into the grown defect MAP.
3. If there are bad blocks in the defect MAP, record the information presented and
ensure that this information is kept with the drive. This data is used later when
the drive is to be overwritten.
4. Use the drive as you would normally.

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 129

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

5. When the drive is no longer needed and is to be erased, run the same version of
the Erase Disk selection which was used in step 2.

Note: Using the same version of the service aid is only critical if any bad blocks
were found in step 3.
6. Compare the bad blocks which were recorded for the drive in step 3 with those
that now appear in the grown defect MAP.

Note: If there are differences between the saved data and the newly obtained
data, then all sectors on this drive cannot be overwritten. The new bad
blocks are not overwritten.
7. If the bad block list is the same, continue running the service aid to overwrite the
disk with the chosen pattern(s).

This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the command syntax:
diag -c -d deviceName -T "format [-s* fmtcert | erase -a {read | write}] [-F]"
Flag Description
fmtcert Formats and certifies the disk.
* Available in no-console mode only.
-F Force the disk erasure even if all blocks cannot be erased due to errors
accessing grown defect map.

Note: The Erase Disk option in command line mode uses default values. To selectively
read or write, use the diag command in console mode.

Hardfile Attached to PCI SCSI RAID Adapter

This function formats the physical disks attached to a PCI SCSI RAID adapter. This
task can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the following command
syntax: diag -c -d RAIDadapterName -T "format {-l chId | -A }"
Flag Description
-l Physical disk channel/ID (An example of a physical disk channel/ID is 27,
where the channel is 2 and the ID is 7.)
-A All disks

Optical Media
Use the following functions to check and verify optical media:
v Optical Media Initialize
Formats the media without certifying. This function does not reassign the defective
blocks or erase the data on the media. This option provides a quick way of formatting
the media and cleaning the disk.

Note: It takes approximately one minute to format the media.

v Optical Media Format and Certify
Formats and certifies the media. This function reassigns the defective blocks and
erases all data on the media.

130 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the following command
syntax: diag -c -d deviceName -T "format [-s {initialize | fmtcert} ]"
Option Description
initialize
Formats media without certifying
fmtcert Formats and certifies the media

Diskette Format
This selection formats a diskette by writing patterns to it.

Gather System Information

This service aid uses the AIX snap command to collect configuration information on
networks, filesystems, security, the kernel, the ODM, and other system components.
You can also choose to collect SSA adapter and disk drive configuration data, or AIX
trace information for software debugging.

The output of the SNAP service aid can be used by field service personnel or it can be
put on removable media and transferred to remote locations for more extensive
analysis.

To use the SNAP task, select Gather System Information from the task list. You can
select which components you want to collect information for, and where to store the
data (hard disk or removable media).

Generic Microcode Download

The Generic Microcode Download service aid provides a means of executing a
genucode script from a diskette or tape. The purpose of this generic script is to load
microcode to a supported resource.

The genucode program should be downloaded onto diskette or tape in tar format while
the microcode image itself goes onto another one in restore format. Running the
Generic Microcode Download task will search for the genucode script on diskette or
tape and execute it. It will ask for a Genucode media to be inserted into the drive. The
service aid moves the genucode script file to the /tmp directory and runs the program
that downloads the microcode to the adapter or device.

This service aid is supported in both concurrent and standalone modes from disk, LAN,
or loadable media.

Hot Plug Task

The Hot Plug Task provides software function for those devices that support hot-plug or
hot-swap capability. This includes PCI adapters, SCSI devices, and some RAID
devices. This task was previously known as ″SCSI Device Identification and Removal″
or ″Identify and Remove Resource.″

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 131

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

The Hot Plug Task has a restriction when running in Standalone or Online Service
mode; new devices may not be added to the system unless there is already a device
with the same FRU part number installed in the system. This restriction is in place
because the device software package for the new device cannot be installed in
Standalone or Online Service mode.

Depending on the environment and the software packages installed, selecting this task
displays the following three subtasks:
v PCI Hot Plug Manager
v SCSI Hot Swap Manager
v RAID Hot Plug Devices

To run the Hot Plug Task directly from the command line, type the following: diag
-T"identifyRemove"

If you are running the diagnostics in Online Concurrent mode, run the Missing Options
Resolution Procedure immediately after adding, removing or replacing any device. Start
the Missing Options Resolution Procedure is by running the diag -a command.

If the Missing Options Resolution Procedure runs with no menus or prompts, then
device configuration is complete. Otherwise, work through each menu to complete
device configuration.

PCI Hot Plug Manager

The PCI Hot Plug Manager task is a SMIT menu that allows you to identify, add,
remove, or replace PCI adapters that are hot-pluggable. The following functions are
available under this task:
v List PCI Hot Plug Slots
v Add a PCI Hot Plug Adapter
v Replace/Remove a PCI Hot Plug Adapter
v Identify a PCI Hot Plug Slot
v Unconfigure Devices
v Configure Devices
v Install/Configure Devices Added After IPL

The List PCI Hot Plug Slots function lists all PCI hot-plug slots. Empty slots and
populated slots are listed. Populated slot information includes the connected logical
device. The slot name consists of the physical location code and the description of the
physical characteristics for the slot.

The Add a PCI Hot Plug Adapter function is used to prepare a slot for the addition of
a new adapter. The function lists all the empty slots that support hot plug. When a slot
is selected, the visual indicator for the slot blinks at the Identify rate. After the slot
location is confirmed, the visual indicator for the specified PCI slot is set to the Action
state. This means the power for the PCI slot is off and the new adapter can be plugged
in.

The Replace/Remove a PCI Hot Plug Adapter function is used to prepare a slot for
adapter exchange. The function lists all the PCI slots that support hot plug and are

132 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

occupied. The list includes the slot’s physical location code and the device name of the
resource installed in the slot. The adapter must be in the Defined state before it can be
prepared for hot-plug removal. When a slot is selected, the visual indicator for the slot
is set to the Identify state. After the slot location is confirmed, the visual indicator for the
specified PCI slot is set to the Action state. This means the power for the PCI slot, is off
and the adapter can be removed or replaced.

The Identify a PCI Hot Plug Slot function is used to help identify the location of a PCI
hot-plug adapter. The function lists all the PCI slots that are occupied or empty and
support hot plug. When a slot is selected for identification, the visual indicator for the
slot is set to the Identify state.

The Unconfigure Devices function attempts to put the selected device, in the PCI
hot-plug slot, into the Defined state. This action must be done before any attempted
hot-plug function. If the unconfigure function fails, it is possible that the device is still in
use by another application. In this case, the customer or system administrator must be
notified to quiesce the device.

The Configure Devices function allows a newly added adapter to be configured into
the system for use. This function should also be done when a new adapter is added to
the system.

The Install/Configure Devices Added After IPL function attempts to install the
necessary software packages for any newly added devices. The software installation
media or packages are required for this function.

Standalone Diagnostics has restrictions on using the PCI Hot-Plug Manager. For
example:
v Adapters that are replaced must be exactly the same FRU part number as the
adapter being replaced.
v New adapters cannot be added unless a device of the same FRU part number
already exists in the system, because the configuration information for the new
adapter is not known after the Standalone Diagnostics are booted.
v The following functions are not available from the Standalone Diagnostics and will
not display in the list:
– Add a PCI Hot Plug Adapter
– Configure Devices
– Install/Configure Devices Added After IPL

You can run this task directly from the command line by typing the following command:
diag -d device -T"identifyRemove"

However, note that some devices support both the PCI Hot-Plug task and the RAID
Hot-Plug Devices task. If this is the case for the device specified, then the Hot Plug
Task displays instead of the PCI Hot Plug Manager menu.

More detailed information concerning PCI Hot-Plug Manager can be found in the AIX
Operating System, System Management Guide.

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 133

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

SCSI Hot Swap Manager

This task was known as ″SCSI Device Identification and Removal″ or ″Identify and
Remove Resources″ in previous releases. This task allows the user to identify, add,
remove, and replace a SCSI device in a system unit that uses a SCSI Enclosure
Services (SES) device. The following functions are available:
v List the SES Devices
v Identify a Device Attached to an SES Device
v Attach a Device to an SES Device
v Replace/Remove a Device Attached to an SES Device
v Configure Added/Replaced Devices

The List the SES Devices function lists all the SCSI hot-swap slots and their contents.
Status information about each slot is also available. The status information available
includes the slot number, device name, whether the slot is populated and configured,
and location.

The Identify a Device Attached to an SES Device function is used to help identify the
location of a device attached to a SES device. This function lists all the slots that
support hot swap that are occupied or empty. When a slot is selected for identification,
the visual indicator for the slot is set to the Identify state.

The Attach a Device to an SES Device function lists all empty hot-swap slots that are
available for the insertion of a new device. After a slot is selected, the power is
removed. If available, the visual indicator for the selected slot is set to the Remove
state. After the device is added, the visual indicator for the selected slot is set to the
Normal state, and power is restored.

The Replace/Remove a Device Attached to an SES Device function lists all

populated hot-swap slots that are available for removal or replacement of the devices.
After a slot is selected, the device populating that slot is Unconfigured; then the power
is removed from that slot. If the Unconfigure operation fails, it is possible that the device
is in use by another application. In this case, the customer or system administrator must
be notified to quiesce the device. If the Unconfigure operation is successful, the visual
indicator for the selected slot is set to the Remove state. After the device is removed or
replaced, the visual indicator, if available for the selected slot, is set to the Normal state,
and power is restored.

Note: Be sure that no other host is using the device before you remove it.

134 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

The Configure Added/Replaced Devices function runs the configuration manager on

the parent adapters that had child devices added or removed. This function ensures
that the devices in the configuration database are configured correctly.

Standalone Diagnostics has restrictions on using the SCSI Hot Plug Manager. For
example:
v Devices being used as replacement devices must be exactly the same type of device
as the device being replaced.
v New devices may not be added unless a device of the same FRU part number
already exists in the system, because the configuration information for the new
device is not known after the Standalone Diagnostics are booted.

You can run this task directly from the command line. See the following command
syntax:
diag -d device-T"identifyRemove"
OR
diag [-c] -d device -T"identifyRemove -a [identify|remove]"
Flag Description
-a Specifies the option under the task.
-c Run the task without displaying menus. Only command line prompts are used.
This flag is only applicable when running an option such as identify or remove.
-d Indicates the SCSI device.
-T Specifies the task to run.

RAID Hot Plug Devices

This selection starts the PCI SCSI-2 F/W RAID Adapter Service Aid.

Local Area Network Analyzer

This selection is used to exercise the LAN communications adapters (Token-Ring,
Ethernet, and (FDDI) Fiber Distributed Data Interface). The following services are
available:
v Connectivity testing between two network stations. Data is transferred between the
two stations, requiring the user to provide the Internet addresses of both stations.
v Monitoring ring (Token-Ring only). The ring is monitored for a specified period of
time. Soft and hard errors are analyzed.

Log Repair Action

The Log Repair Action task logs a repair action in the AIX Error Log. A Repair Action
log indicates that a FRU has been replaced, and error log analysis should not be done
for any errors logged before the repair action. The Log Repair Action task lists all
resources. Replaced resources can be selected from the list, and when commit (F7
key) is selected, a repair action is logged for each selected resource. For more
information see, .

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 135

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Periodic Diagnostics
This selection provides a tool for configuring periodic diagnostics and automatic error
log analysis. You can select a hardware resource to be tested once a day, at a
user-specified time.

Hardware errors logged against a resource can also be monitored by enabling

automatic error log analysis. This allows error log analysis to be performed every time a
hardware error is put into the error log. If a problem is detected, a message is posted to
the system console and either sent to the Service Focal Point when there is an
attached HMC, or a mail message to the users belonging to the system group
containing information about the failure, such as the service request number.

The service aid provides the following functions:

v Add or delete a resource to the periodic test list
v Modify the time to test a resource
v Display the periodic test list
v Modify the error notification mailing list
v Disable or enable automatic error log analysis

PCI RAID Physical Disk Identify

This selection identifies physical disks connected to a PCI SCSI-2 F/W RAID adapter.

You can run this task directly from the AIX command line. See the following command
syntax: diag -c -d pci RAID adapter -T identify

Process Supplemental Media

Diagnostic Supplemental Media contains all the necessary diagnostic programs and
files required to test a particular resource. The supplemental media is normally released
and shipped with the resource as indicated on the diskette label. Diagnostic
Supplemental Media must be used when the device support has not been incorporated
into the latest diagnostic CD-ROM.

This task processes the Diagnostic Supplemental Media. Insert the supplemental media
when you are prompted; then press Enter. After processing has completed, go to the
Resource Selection list to find the resource to test.
Notes:
1. This task is supported in Standalone Diagnostics only.
2. Process and test one resource at a time. Run diagnostics after each supplemental
media is processed. (for example; If you need to process two supplemental media
you need to run diagnostic twice. Once after each supplement media is processed.)

136 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Run Diagnostics
The Run Diagnostics task invokes the Resource Selection List menu. When the commit
key is pressed, diagnostics are run on all selected resources.

The procedures for running the diagnostics depends on the state of the diagnostics
run-time options. See “Display or Change Diagnostic Run-Time Options” on page 122.

Run Error Log Analysis

The Run Error Log Analysis task invokes the Resource Selection List menu. When the
commit key is pressed, Error Log Analysis is run on all selected resources.

Run Exercisers
The Run Exercisers task provides a tool to troubleshoot intermittent system problems in
AIX 4.3.2 or later, to test hardware, and to verify replacement parts. When AIX error
logging is enabled, the Run Error Log Analysis task can be used to analyze errors after
the exerciser completes. Hardware errors are logged in the AIX Error Log. Miscompares
and recoverable errors are not reported, however, they may be logged in the AIX Error
Log when logging thresholds are exceeded.

The diagnostic supervisor typically sets up temporary work files in /tmp to log
messages and device statistics. These files are deleted before an exerciser session
begins. In addition to individual exerciser requirements, the following requirements
pertain to all exercisers:
v Only supported on CHRP platforms
v Only supported in concurrent or service modes
v Not supported from standalone diagnostics
v System performance will be degraded while running the exerciser, so it is
recommended that customer applications be shut down before it is run.
v At least 1 MB of free storage in /tmp is available

From the TASK SELECTION LIST menu select Run Exercisers then the RESOURCES
SELECTION LIST menu displays. From this menu choose the resources you want to
exercise and then select commit to start the Run Exerciser task. An intermediate
popup may appear stating system performance will be degraded. (The popup does not
appear if the task had previously been selected). Press Enter and the EXERCISER
OPTIONS menu prompts for the type of test to run.

The EXERCISER OPTIONS menu displays two options (1) Short Exercise and (2)
Extended Exercise. The Short Exercise option exercises the resources within a
relatively short time and exits. The Extended Exercise option allows greater flexibility
and control over resources and test duration.

After choosing the Short Exercise option, additional menus, pop-ups and prompts may
appear for each resource. Please read any text and carefully fill out any prompts before
committing. Next, the exercisers start, and the Device Status Screen displays. The
exercisers runs 5 to 10 minutes depending on the number of processors, processor

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 137

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

speed, memory size, and I/O configuration. After choosing the Extended Exercise
option, additional menus, pop-ups and prompts may appear for each resource. Please
read any text and carefully fill out any prompts before committing. Following, the
System Exerciser Main Menu displays. From this menu the exercisers can be
activated through option 1 where they will continuously run until halted (option 2) or
exited (option x). See also the help text for information on how to use other available
options.

When the task completes any errors that were encountered are displayed for review.
Finally, an Exerciser Complete popup displays. To continue, press the Enter key.
Following, you will be taken back to the TASK SELECTION LIST menu. If miscompare
errors were encountered, run diagnostics on the resource. If the problem is not reported
then contact your service support structure. If any other errors were encountered, select
and run the Error Log Analysis task. If Error Log Analysis does not report a problem
then contact your service support structure.

Exerciser Commands (CMD)

Use the following commands as needed in the exerciser menus and reports. Not all
commands are available in each menu or report.
CMD Description
a Acknowledge an error
b Back one page
c Toggle between cycle count and last error
e View the AIX error log
f Page forward one page
q Return to Main Menu
r Refresh screen
s Enable or disable beep on error
x Exit system exerciser

Abbreviations
The following list describes abbreviations used in the exerciser reports.
Acronym Description
COE Continue on error (use number to select).
CP Device has run the specified number of cycles and is not running.
DD The exerciser has been terminated by a signal.
ER Device has stopped with an error.
HG The device is hung.
HOE Halt on error (use number to select).
RN Device is running.
ST Device is stopped.

138 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Memory Exerciser
The memory exercisers are labeled memx, where x is a number for the exerciser.
Multiple exercisers can be active.

The memory exerciser requests as many memory buffers as possible from AIX. The
exerciser then fills the memory buffers with specified bit patterns, then reads and
compares the memory buffers to the specified bit patterns.

On systems with multiple processors, a process is started for each processor. The free
memory space is split evenly between the available processors, thus reducing the time
required to exercise all of the memory.

Running this service aid requires 128 KB of free space in /etc/lpp/diagnostics/data.

Tape Exerciser
The tape exerciser is labeled rmtx, where x is the number of a specific device. The
exerciser performs read, write, and compare operations using known data patterns. A
tape device and Test Diagnostic Cartridge are required to run this exerciser. The actual
Test Diagnostics Cartridge depends upon the specific tape device being tested. The
exerciser automatically rewinds the tape. Test Requirements are:
v Tape device
v Test Diagnostic Cartridge; (P/N depends upon tape device)

Diskette Exerciser
The diskette exerciser is labeled fdx, where x is the number of a specific device. The
exerciser performs read, write, and compare operations using known data patterns. A
scratch diskette is required to run this exerciser, data on the scratch diskette is
destroyed. Test requirements are:
v Diskette device
v Scratch diskette (data on diskette is destroyed)

CD-ROM Exerciser
The CD-ROM exerciser is labeled cdx, where x is the number of a specific device. The
exerciser performs read and compare operations using known data patterns. A
CD-ROM device and a Test Disc is required to run this exerciser. Test requirements are:
v CD-ROM device
v Test Disc P/N 81F8902

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 139

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Save or Restore Hardware Management Policies

Note: This service aid runs on CHRP system units only.

Use this service aid to save or restore the settings from Ring Indicate Power-On Policy,
Surveillance Policy, Remote Maintenance Policy and Reboot Policy. The following
options are available:
v Save Hardware Management Policies
This selection writes all of the settings for the hardware-management policies to the
following file: /etc/lpp/diagnostics/data/hmpolicies
v Restore Hardware Management Policies
This selection restores all of the settings for the hardware-management policies from
the contents of the following file: /etc/lpp/diagnostics/data/hmpolicies

You can access this service aid directly from the AIX command line, by typing:
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -a

Save or Restore Service Processor Configuration

Note: This service aid runs on RSPC system units only.

Use this service aid to save or restore the Service Processor Configuration to or from a
file. The Service Processor Configuration includes the Ring Indicator Power-On
Configuration. The following options are available:
v Save Service Processor Configuration
This selection writes all of the settings for the Ring Indicate Power On and the
Service Processor to the following file: /etc/lpp/diagnostics/data/spconfig
v Restore Service Processor Configuration
This selection restores all of the settings for the Ring Indicate Power On and the
Service Processor from the following file: /etc/lpp/diagnostics/data/spconfig

140 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

SCSI Bus Analyzer

This service aid allows you to diagnose a SCSI bus problem in a freelance mode.

To use this service aid, the user should understand how a SCSI bus works. Use this
service aid when the diagnostics cannot communicate with anything on the SCSI bus
and cannot isolate the problem. Normally the procedure for finding a problem on the
SCSI bus with this service aid is to start with a single device attached, ensure that it is
working, then start adding additional devices and cables to the bus, ensuring that each
one works. This service aid works with any valid SCSI bus configuration.

The SCSI Bus Service Aid transmits a SCSI Inquiry command to a selectable SCSI
Address. The service aid then waits for a response. If no response is received within a
defined amount of time, the service aid displays a timeout message. If an error occurs
or a response is received, the service aid then displays one of the following messages:
v The service aid transmitted a SCSI Inquiry Command and received a valid
response back without any errors being detected.
v The service aid transmitted a SCSI Inquiry Command and did not receive any
response or error status back.
v The service aid transmitted a SCSI Inquiry Command and the adapter indicated
a SCSI bus error.
v The service aid transmitted a SCSI Inquiry Command and an adapter error
occurred.
v The service aid transmitted a SCSI Inquiry Command and a check condition
occur.

When the SCSI Bus Service Aid is started a description of the service aid displays.

Pressing the Enter key displays the Adapter Selection menu. Use this menu to enter the
address to transmit the SCSI Inquiry Command.

When the adapter is selected, the SCSI Bus Address Selection menu displays. Use this
menu to enter the address to transmit the SCSI Inquiry Command.

After the address is selected, the SCSI Bus Test Run menu displays. Use this menu to
transmit the SCSI Inquiry Command by pressing Enter. The service aid then indicates
the status of the transmission. When the transmission is completed, the results of the
transmission displays.
Notes:
1. A Check Condition can be returned when the bus or device is working correctly.
2. AIX does not allow the command to be sent if the device is in use by another
process.

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 141

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

SCSD Tape Drive Service Aid

This service aid allows you to obtain the status or maintenance information from a
SCSD tape drive. Not all models of SCSD tape drive are supported.

The service aid provides the following options:

v Display time since a tape drive was last cleaned. The time since the drive was last
cleaned displays on the screen, as well as a message regarding whether the drive is
recommended to be cleaned.
v Copy a tape drive’s trace table. The trace table of the tape drive is written to
diskettes or a file. The diskettes must be formatted for DOS. Writing the trace table
may require several diskettes. The actual number of diskettes is determined by the
size of the trace table. Label the diskettes as follows:
TRACEx.DAT (where x is a sequential diskette number). The complete trace table
consists of the sequential concatenation of all the diskette data files.
When the trace table is written to a disk file, the service aid prompts for a file name.
The default name is: /tmp/TRACE.x, where x is the AIX name of the SCSD tape
drive being tested.
v Display or copy a tape drive’s log sense information. The service aid provides
options to display the log sense information to the screen, to copy it to a DOS
formatted diskette, or to copy it to a file. The file name LOGSENSE.DAT is used
when the log sense data is written to the diskette. The service aid prompts for a file
name when you have selected that the log sense data is to be copied to a file.

This service aid can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the following
command syntax (path is /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/utape):
utape [-h | -?] [-d device] [-n | -l | -t]
OR
utape -c -d device [-v] {-n | {-l | -t} { -D | -f [ filename]}}
Flag Description
-c Run the service aid without displaying menus. The return code indicates
success or failure. The output is suppressed except for the usage statement
and the numeric value for hours since cleaning (if -n and -D flags are used).
-D Copy data to diskette.
-f Copy data to the file name given after this flag or to a default file name if no
name is specified.
-h, -? Display a usage statement and/or return code. If the -c flag is present, only the
return code displays to indicate the service aid did not run. If the -c is not
used, a usage statement displays and the service aid exits.
-l Display or copy log sense information.
-n Display time since drive was last cleaned.
-t Copy trace table.
-v Verbose mode. If the -c flag is present, the information displays on the screen.
If the -n flag is present, the information about tape-head cleaning is printed.

142 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Spare Sector Availability

This selection checks the number of spare sectors available on the optical disk. The
spare sectors are used to reassign when defective sectors are encountered during
normal usage or during a format and certify operation. Low availability of spare sectors
indicates that the disk needs to be backed up and replaced. Formatting the disk does
not improve the availability of spare sectors.

You can run this task directly from the AIX command line. See the following command
syntax: diag -c -d deviceName -T chkspares

SSA Service Aid

This service aid provides tools for diagnosing and resolving problems on SSA-attached
devices. The following tools are provided:
v Set Service Mode
v Link Verification
v Configuration Verification
v Format and Certify Disk

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 143

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

System Fault Indicator

This task is used to display or reset the system fault indicator on systems that support
this function. This task is also used to set the system fault indicator for testing
purposes, but the system fault indicator is set back to Normal when you exit this task.

The system fault indicator is used to identify a fault with the system. This indicator is set
automatically by hardware firmware, or diagnostics when a fault is detected in the
system.

The system fault indicator is turned off when a Log Repair Action is performed. After a
serviceable event is complete, do a System Verification to verify the fix. At this time,
also do a Log Repair Action if the test on the resource was good and that resource had
an entry in the error log.

If the serviceable event was not the result of an error log entry, use the Log Repair
Action task to turn off the system fault indicator.

Refer to the system unit service guide for additional information concerning the use of
this indicator.

Note: The AIX command does not allow you to set the system fault indicator to the
Fault state.

Use the following example to run this task directly from the AIX command line:
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/usysfault [-s normal]
Flag Description
-s Normal, sets the system fault indicator to the Normal state.

When this command is used without the -s flag, the current state of the indicator
displays.

144 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

System Identify Indicator

This task is used to display or set the system identify indicator on systems that support
this function.

The system identify indicator is used to help physically identify a particular system in
group of systems. Refer to the system unit service guide for additional information
concerning the use of this indicator.

Use the following example to run this task directly from the AIX command line:
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/usysident [-s {normal | identify}]
Flag Description
-s {normal | identify} Sets the state of the System Identify Indicator to
either Normal or Identify.

When this command is used without the -s flag, the current state of the indicator
displays.

Update Disk-Based Diagnostics

This service aid allows fixes (APARs) to be applied.

This task invokes the SMIT Update Software by Fix (APAR) task. The task allows the
input device and APARs to be selected. You can install any APAR using this task.

Update System or Service Processor Flash

Note: This service aid runs on CHRP system units only.

This selection updates the system or service processor flash for CHRP system units.
Some systems may have separate images for system and service processor firmware;
newer systems have a combined image that contains both in one image.

Look for additional update and recovery instructions with the update kit. You need to
know the fully qualified path and file name of the flash update image file provided in the
kit. If the update image file is on a diskette, the service aid can list the files on the
diskette for selection. The diskette must be a valid backup format diskette.

Refer to the update instructions with the kit, or the service guide for the system unit to
determine the current level of the system unit or service processor flash memory.

When this service aid is run from online diagnostics, the flash update image file is
copied to the /var file system. It is recommended that the source of the microcode that
you want to download be put into the /etc/microcode directory on the system. If there
is not enough space in the /var file system for the new flash update image file, an error
is reported. If this error occurs, exit the service aid, increase the size of the /var file
system, and retry the service aid. After the file is copied, a screen requests confirmation
before continuing with the flash update. When you continue the update flash, the

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 145

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

system reboots using the shutdown -u command. The system does not return to the
diagnostics, and the current flash image is not saved. After the reboot, you can remove
the /var/update_flash_image file.

When this service aid is run from standalone diagnostics, the flash update image file is
copied to the file system from diskette or from the NIM server. Using a diskette, the
user must provide the image on backup format diskette because the user does not
have access to remote file systems or any other files that are on the system. If using
the NIM server, the microcode image must first be copied onto the NIM server in the
/usr/lib/microcode directory pointed to the NIM SPOT (from which you plan to have
the NIM client boot standalone diagnostics) prior to performing the NIM boot of
diagnostics. Next, a NIM check operation must be run on the SPOT containing the
microcode image on the NIM server. After performing the NIM boot of diagnostics one
can use this service aid to update the microcode from the NIM server by choosing the
/usr/lib/microcode directory when prompted for the source of the microcode that you
want to update. If not enough space is available, an error is reported, stating additional
system memory is needed. After the file is copied, a screen requests confirmation
before continuing with the flash update. When you continue with the update, the system
reboots using the reboot -u command. You may receive a Caution: some process(es)
wouldn’t die message during the reboot process, you can ignore this message. The
current flash image is not saved.

You can use the update_flash command in place of this service aid. The command is
located in the /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin directory. The command syntax is as follows:
update_flash [-q] -f file_name
update_flash [-q] -D device_name -f file_name
update_flash [-q] -D update_flash [-q] -D device_name -l
Flag Description
-D Specifies that the flash update image file is on diskette. The device_name
variable specifies the diskette drive. The default device_name is /dev/fd0.
-f Flash update image file source. The file_name variable specifies the fully
qualified path of the flash update image file.
-l Lists the files on a diskette, from which the user can choose a flash update
image file.
-q Forces the update_flash command to update the flash EPROM and reboot
the system without asking for confirmation.

Attention: The update_flash command reboots the entire system. Do not use this
command if more than one user is logged on to the system.

146 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Update System Flash

Note: This service aid runs on RSPC system units only.

This selection updates the system flash for RSPC systems. The user provides a valid
binary image either on a diskette or with a qualified path name. The diskettes can be in
DOS or backup format.

The flash update image is copied to the /var file system. If not enough space is
available in the file system for the flash update image file, an error is reported. If this
error occurs, increase the file size of the /var file system. The current flash image is not
saved. The command automatically removes the /var/update_flash_image file.

After user confirmation, the command reboots the system twice to complete the flash
update.

7135 RAIDiant Array Service Aid

The 7135 RAIDiant Array service aids contain the following functions:
v Certify LUN
Reads and checks each block of data in the logical unit number (LUN). If excessive
errors are encountered, the user is notified.
v Certify Spare Physical Disk
Allows the user to certify (check the integrity of the data) on drives designated as
spares.
v Format Physical Disk
Formats a selected disk drive.
v Array Controller Microcode Download
Allows the microcode on the 7135 controller to be updated when required.
v Physical Disk Microcode Download
Updates the microcode on any of the disk drives in the array.
v Update EEPROM
Updates the contents of the EEPROM on a selected controller.
v Replace Controller
Replaces a controller in the array.

Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 147

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Command Examples
Use this command syntax to download the adapter microcode:
diag -c -d deviceName -T "download [-B][-D][-P]"
Flag Description
-B Download boot block microcode (default to functional microcode)
-D Microcode is on diskette (default to /etc/microcode directory)
-P Download the previous level of microcode (default to latest level)

Use this command syntax to download physical disk microcode:

diag -c -d deviceName -T "download -l ChId [-D][-P]"
Flag Description
-D Microcode is on diskette (default to /etc/microcode directory)
-l Physical disk channel/ID (for example, 27)
-P Download the previous level of microcode (default to latest level)

Use this command syntax to format a physical disk:

diag -c -d deviceName -T "format -l ChId″
Flag Description
-l Physical disk channel/ID (for example, 27)

Use this command syntax to certify a physical disk:

diag -c -d deviceName -T "certify -l ChId″
Flag Description
-l Physical disk channel/ID (for example, 23)

Use this command syntax to identify a physical disk:

diag -c -d deviceName -T "identify"

7318 Serial Communications Network Server Service Aid

This service aid provides a tool for diagnosing terminal server problems.

148 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Chapter 7. Verifying the Hardware Operation

The system verification procedure checks the system for correct hardware operation. If
you have a problem with your system in the future, use this procedure to test the
system hardware to help you determine if you have a hardware problem. Run the
system verification procedure as described in the following steps.

Running System Verification When Not Connected to an Hardware Management

Console (HMC)
If you running this procedure and are not connected to an HMC, do the following, if you
are connected to an HMC, go to the “Running System Verification When Connected to
an Hardware Management Console (HMC)” on page 100.

Step 1. Considerations Before Running This Procedure

Read the following before using this procedure:
v The AIX operating system must be installed on your system before you attempt to
perform this procedure.
v If this system unit is directly attached to another system unit or attached to a
network, be sure communication with the other systems is stopped.
v This procedure requires use of all of the system resources. No other activity can be
running on the system while you are performing this procedure.
v This procedure requires a display connected to a graphics adapter, an ASCII terminal
attached to the S1 port, or a HMC connected to a HMC port on the system.
v This procedure runs the AIX online diagnostics in service mode. If the system
console is an ASCII terminal, see the documentation for your type of ASCII terminal
to find the key sequences you need in order to respond to the diagnostics.
v If a console display is not selected, the diagnostics stop. The instructions for
selecting a console display are displayed on all of the graphic displays and any
terminal attached to the S1 port. Follow the displayed instructions to select a console
display.
v If your system is connected to an HMC, refer to “Step 1. Running Online Diagnostics
in Service Mode” on page 100.

149
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Step 2. Loading the Diagnostics

Consider the following items before loading the diagnostics:
v If the system is in standby mode (Power-On LED on the operator panel is slowly
blinking and the operator panel displays OK), skip the first three steps of this
procedure. If your system is not running and is not connected to a HMC, begin with
step 4. If you are connected to an HMC go to “Step 1. Running Online Diagnostics in
Service Mode” on page 100.

To begin loading the diagnostics on a system not connected to an HMC, do the

following:
1. Stop all application programs running on the operating system.
2. Stop the operating system by logging on as root user and typing shutdown.
3. Wait for the system to go into standby mode.
v The operator panel LED starts to blink at a slow rate.
v The OK message appears in the operator panel.

The figure below shows the operator panel and the locations of operator panel
components that are referred to in this procedure.

1 Power-On Button 6 Operator Panel Display

2 Power LED 7 (FS1) Front Serial
Connector (RJ48 Connector)
3 Attention LED 8 CSP Reset Switch (Pinhole)
4 SCSI Port Activity 9 System Reset Button
5 Ethernet Port Activity

4. Turn on the system unit power.

5. After the keyboard POST indicator displays on the firmware console and before the
last POST indicator (speaker) displays, press the numeric 6 key on either the
directly attached keyboard or the ASCII terminal to indicate that a service mode
boot should be initiated using the customized service mode boot list.
6. Enter any requested password.

Note: If you are unable to load the diagnostics to the point when the DIAGNOSTIC
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS display, call your support center for assistance.

150 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Step 3. Running the Verification Procedure

When the Diagnostic Operating Instructions display, do the following to run system
verification:
1. Press Enter.
2. If the terminal type has not been defined, you must use the Initialize Terminal
option on the Function Selection menu to initialize the operating system
environment before you can continue with the diagnostics.
3. If you want to do a general checkout, with minimal operator action, select the
Diagnostic Routines option on the Function Selection menu.
If you want to do a more complete checkout, including the use of wrap plugs, select
the Advanced Diagnostics option on the Function Selection menu. The advanced
diagnostics are primarily for the service representative; the diagnostics may instruct
you to install wrap plugs to better isolate a problem.
4. Select the System Verification option on the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu.
5. If you want to run a general checkout of all installed resources, select the All
Resource option on the Diagnostic Selection menu.
If you want to check one particular resource, select that resource on the Diagnostic
Selection menu.

The checkout programs end with either of the following results:

v The Testing Complete menu displays with a message stating No trouble was found.
v The A Problem Was Detected On (Time Stamp) menu displays, with either a service
request number (SRN) or an error code. Make a note of any codes displayed on the
display or operator panel.

Step 4. Performing Additional System Verification

To perform additional system verification, do the following:
1. Press Enter to return to the Diagnostic Selection menu.
2. To check other resources, select the resource. When you have checked all of the
resources you need to check, go to “Step 5. Stopping the Diagnostics”.

Step 5. Stopping the Diagnostics

To stop the diagnostics, do the following:
1. To exit the diagnostics, press the F3 key (from a defined terminal) or press 99 (from
an undefined terminal).
2. If you changed any attributes on your ASCII terminal to run the diagnostics, change
the settings back to normal.
3. This completes the system verification. If you received an error code, record the
code and report it to the service organization.

If the system passed all the diagnostic tests, the verification process is complete and
your system is ready to use.

Chapter 7. Verifying the Hardware Operation 151

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Running System Verification When Connected to an (HMC)

Run the following procedure only if you are connected to an HMC.

Step 1. Running Online Diagnostics in Service Mode

To run the online diagnostics in service mode from the boot hard disk, do the following:
1. From the HMC select the Partition Manager.
2. Right-click on the mouse and select Open Terminal Window
3. From the Service Processor Menu on the VTERM, select Option 2 System Power
Control.
4. Select option 6. Verify that the state changes to currently disabled. Disabling
fast system boot automatically enables slow boot.
5. Select Option 98 to exit the system power control menu.
6. Use the HMC to power on the managed system in a full system partition by
selecting the managed system in the Contents area.
7. Right click or select the desired system in the Contents area. Next, on the menu,
choose Selected.
8. Select Power On.
9. Select the Power on Diagnostic Stored Boot list option (refer to Full System
Management Tasks in the, order number, for more information on full system
partitions).
10. Make sure that there are no media in the devices in the media subsystem.
11. Enter any passwords, if requested.

Note: If you are unable to load the diagnostics to the point when the DIAGNOSTIC
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS display, call your support center for assistance.

152 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Step 2. Running the Verification Procedure

When the Diagnostic Operating Instructions display, do the following to run system
verification:
1. Press Enter.
2. If the terminal type has not been defined, you must use the Initialize Terminal
option on the Function Selection menu to initialize the operating system
environment before you can continue with the diagnostics.
3. If you want to do a general checkout, with minimal operator action, select the
Diagnostic Routines option on the Function Selection menu.
If you want to do a more complete checkout, including the use of wrap plugs, select
the Advanced Diagnostics option on the Function Selection menu. The advanced
diagnostics are primarily for the service representative; the diagnostics may instruct
you to install wrap plugs to better isolate a problem.
4. Select the System Verification option on the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu.
5. If you want to run a general checkout of all installed resources, select the All
Resource option on the Diagnostic Selection menu.
If you want to check one particular resource, select that resource on the Diagnostic
Selection menu.

The checkout programs end with either of the following results:

v The Testing Complete menu displays with a message stating No trouble was found.
v The A Problem Was Detected On (Time Stamp) menu displays, with either a service
request number (SRN) or an error code. Make a note of any codes displayed on the
display or operator panel.

Step 3. Performing Additional System Verification

To perform additional system verification, do the following:
1. Press Enter to return to the Diagnostic Selection menu.
2. To check other resources, select the resource. When you have checked all of the
resources you need to check, go to “Step 4. Stopping the Diagnostics” on page 101.

Step 4. Stopping the Diagnostics

To stop the diagnostics, do the following:
1. To exit the diagnostics, press the F3 key (from a defined terminal) or press 99 (from
an undefined terminal).
2. If you changed any attributes on your ASCII terminal to run the diagnostics, change
the settings back to normal.
3. This completes the system verification. If you received an error code, record the
code and report it to the service organization.

If the system passed all the diagnostic tests, the verification process is complete and
your system is ready to use.

Chapter 7. Verifying the Hardware Operation 153

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

154 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination

This chapter provides information on using standalone or online diagnostics to help you
solve hardware problems.

Problem Determination Using the Standalone or Online Diagnostics

Use this procedure to obtain a service request number (SRN) when you are able to
load the Standalone or Online Diagnostics. If you are unable to load the Standalone or
Online Diagnostics, go to “Problem Determination When Unable to Load Diagnostics”
on page 162. The service organization uses the SRN to determine which field
replaceable units (FRUs) are needed to restore the system to correct operation.

Step 1. Considerations before Running This Procedure

Note: See the operator manual for your ASCII terminal to find the key sequences you
need to respond to the diagnostic programs.
v The diagnostics can use a display connected to the video port or an ASCII terminal
attached to a serial port.
v This procedure asks you to select the type of diagnostics you want to run. If you
need more information about the types, see Chapter 5, “Using the Standalone and
Online Diagnostics” on page 91.
v Go to “Step 2.”.

Step 2.
Is the Attention LED on?
NO Go to “Step 3”.
YES Go to .

Step 3
Are the Online Diagnostics installed on this system?
NO Go to “Step 16” on page 161.
YES Go to “Step 4” on page 156.

155
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Step 4
Determine if the operating system is accepting commands.

Is the operating system accepting commands?

NO The system must be turned off in order to run diagnostics.
Verify with the system administrator and users that the system may
be turned off. If so, then turn off the system unit and go to “Step 7” on
page 157.
YES Go to “Step 5”.

Step 5
Diagnostic tests can be run on many resources while the operating system is running.
However, you can obtain more extensive problem isolation by running Online
Diagnostics in Service mode.

Do you want to run the Online Diagnostics in Service mode?

NO Go to “Step 6”.
YES Do the following to shut down your system:
1. At the system prompt, stop the operating system using the
appropriate command for your operating system.
2. After the operating system is stopped, turn off the system unit.
3. 3. Go to “Step 7” on page 157.

Step 6
This step invokes the Online Diagnostics in concurrent mode.
1. Log in as root user.
2. Enter the diag command.
3. Wait until the Diagnostic Operating Instructions are displayed, or wait for three
minutes.

Are the Diagnostic Operating Instructions displayed without any obvious console
display problems?
NO Do the following to shut down your system:
1. At the system prompt, stop the operating system using the
appropriate command for your operating system.
2. After the operating system is stopped, turn off the system unit.
3. 3. Go to “Step 7” on page 157.
YES Go to “Step 10” on page 158.

156 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Step 7
This step loads Online Diagnostics in service mode. If you are unable to load the
diagnostics, go to “Step 8”.
1. Turn on the power.
2. When the keyboard indicator (icon or text) appears, press F6 on the directly
attached keyboard, or 6 on the ASCII terminal keyboard, to indicate that diagnostics
are to be loaded.
3. Enter any requested passwords.
4. Follow any instructions to select a console.

Did the Diagnostics Operating Instructions display without any obvious display
problem?
NO Go to “Step 8”.
YES Go to “Step 10” on page 158.

Step 8
Starting at the top of the following table, find your symptom and follow the instructions
given in the Action column.

Symptom Action
Display problem Go to “Step 9”.
All other symptoms Go to “Problem Determination When Unable to
Load Diagnostics” on page 162

Step 9
Find your type of console display in the following table. Then follow the instructions
given in the Action column.

Console Display Action

Display Device Go to the display documentation for problem
determination.
ASCII terminal Go to the problem-determination documentation
for this type of terminal.

Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination 157

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Step 10
The diagnostics loaded correctly.

Press the Enter key.

Is the Function Selection menu displayed?

NO Go to “Step 11”.
YES Go to “Step 12” on page 159.

Step 11
There is a problem with the keyboard.

Find the type of keyboard you are using in the following table. Then follow the
instructions given in the Action column.

Keyboard Type Action

101–key keyboard. Identify by the type of Enter Record error code M0KBD001 and report the
key used. The Enter key is within one problem to the service organization.
horizontal row of keys.
102–key keyboard. Identify by the type of Enter Record error code M0KBD002 and report the
key used. The Enter key extends into two problem to the service organization.
horizontal rows of keys.
Kanji keyboard. Identify by the Japanese Record error code M0KBD003 and report the
characters. problem to the service organization.
ASCII–terminal keyboard. This applies to all Go to the problem-determination documentation
attached terminals. for this type of terminal.

158 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Step 12
1. If the terminal type has not been defined, use the Initialize Terminal option on the
Function Selection menu to initialize the operating system environment before you
can continue with the diagnostics. This is a separate and different operation from
selecting the console display.
2. Select Diagnostic Routines.
3. Press the Enter key.
4. In the following table, find the menu or system response you received when you
selected Diagnostics. Follow the instructions given in the Action column.

System Response Action

The Diagnostic Mode Selection menu is Select Problem Determination and go to “Step
displayed. 13” on page 160.
The Missing Resource menu is displayed. Follow the displayed instructions until either the
Diagnostic Mode Selection menu or an SRN is
displayed.

If the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu is

displayed, select Problem Determination and go
to “Step 13” on page 160.

If you get an SRN, record it, and go to “Step

15” on page 160.
The New Resource menu is displayed. Follow the displayed instructions.
Note: Devices attached to serial ports S1 or
S2 do not appear on the New Resource menu.
Also, ISA adapters do not appear unless they
have been identified and configured.

If the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu is

displayed, select Problem Determination and go
to “Step 13” on page 160.

If you get an SRN, record it, and go to “Step

15” on page 160.

If you do not get an SRN, go to “Step 18” on

page 161.
The system does not respond to selecting Go to “Step 11” on page 158.
diagnostics.

Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination 159

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Step 13
Did the Diagnostic Selection Menu display?
NO If Problem Determination was selected from the Diagnostic Mode
Selection menu, and if a recent error has been logged in the error log,
the diagnostics automatically begin testing the resource. Follow the
displayed instructions.
v If the No Trouble Found screen is displayed, press Enter.
v If another resource is tested, repeat this step.
v If the Diagnostic Selection menu is displayed, go to “Step 14”.
v If an SRN is displayed, record it, and go to “Step 15”.
YES Go to “Step 14”.

Step 14
The All Resources option checks most of the configured adapters and devices.

Select and run the diagnostic tests on the resources you are having problems with or
select the All Resources option to check all of the configured resources. Find the
response in the following table and follow the instructions given in the Action column.

Diagnostic Response Action

An SRN is displayed. Go to “Step 15”.
The system hangs. Report SRN 109-200.
The Testing Complete menu and the No Press Enter and continue with the testing.
trouble was found message displays and you
have not tested all of the resources.
The Testing Complete menu and the No Go to “Step 18” on page 161.
trouble was found message displays and you
have tested all of the resources.

Step 15
The diagnostics produced an SRN for this problem. Do the following:
1. Record the SRN and other numbers read out.
2. Report the SRN to the service organization.
3. STOP. You have completed these procedures.

160 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Step 16
When you are loading the Standalone Diagnostics, the attributes for the terminal must
be set to match the defaults of the diagnostic programs. The ASCII terminal must be
attached to serial port 1 on the system unit.

Are you going to load Standalone Diagnostics and run them from a ASCII
terminal?
NO Go to “Step 17”.
YES Go to “Running the Diagnostics from a TTY Terminal” on page 97 and
be sure your terminal attributes are set to work with the diagnostic
programs.
Return to “Step 17” when you finish checking the attributes. Record
any settings that are changed.

Step 17
This step loads the Standalone Diagnostics. If you are unable to load the diagnostics,
go to “Step 8” on page 157.
1. Turn on the power.
2. Insert the diagnostic CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
3. When the keyboard indicator displays, press F5 on the directly attached keyboard,
or 5 on the ASCII keyboard, to indicate that diagnostics are to be loaded.
4. Enter any requested passwords.
5. Follow any instructions to select a console.

Did the Diagnostics Operating Instructions display without any obvious display
problem?
NO Go to “Step 8” on page 157.
YES Go to “Step 10” on page 158.

Step 18
The diagnostics did not find a hardware problem. If you still have a problem, contact
your software support center.

Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination 161

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Problem Determination When Unable to Load Diagnostics

Use this procedure to obtain an error code. The service organization uses the error
code to determine which field replaceable units (FRUs) are needed to restore the
system to correct operation.

Step 1. Considerations before Running This Procedure

v The diagnostics can use a display connected to the video port or an ASCII terminal
attached to a serial port.
v Go to “Step 2”.

Step 2
Are the Online Diagnostics installed on this system?
NO Go to “Step 4” on page 163.
YES Go to “Step 3”.

Step 3
This step attempts to load Online Diagnostics in service mode.
1. Turn off the power.
2. Turn on the power.
3. If the keyboard indicator displays, press F6 on the directly attached keyboard, or 6
on the ASCII keyboard, to indicate that diagnostics are to be loaded.
4. Enter any requested passwords.
5. Follow any instructions to select a console.
6. Wait until the diagnostics load or the system appears to stop.

Did the diagnostics load?

NO Go to “Step 5” on page 163.
YES Go to “Step 6” on page 166.

162 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Step 4
This step attempts to load the Standalone diagnostics.
1. Turn off the power.
2. Turn on the power.
3. Insert the diagnostic CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
4. If the keyboard indicator displays, press F5 on the directly attached keyboard, or 5
on the ASCII keyboard, to indicate that diagnostics are to be loaded.
5. Enter any requested passwords.
6. Follow any instructions to select a console.
7. Wait until the diagnostics load or the system appears to stop.

Did the diagnostics load?

NO Go to “Step 5”.
YES Go to “Step 6” on page 166.

Step 5
Starting at the top of the following table, find your symptom and follow the instructions
given in the Action column.

Symptom Action
The power LED does not come on, or comes Check the power cable to the outlet. Check the
on and does not stay on. circuit breakers and check for power at the
outlet.

Ensure that the room temperature is within 60 -

90°F.

If you do not find a problem, record error code

M0PS0000 and report the problem to the
service organization.
The system appears to be stopped and NO Processor POST failure. Report error code
beep was heard from the system unit. M0CPU000.
The system appears to be stopped and NO No good memory could be found. Report error
beep was heard from the system unit. E122, code M0MEM000.
E123, or E124 is displayed on the operator
panel display.
The system appears to be stopped. A beep was No good memory could be found. Report error
heard from the system unit. code M0MEM001.
The diagnostics are loaded and there was NO Record error code M0SPK001.
beep heard from the system unit during the IPL
sequence.
The system stops with the Diagnostic Operating Go to “Step 6” on page 166.
Instructions displayed.
The diskette LED is blinking rapidly, or E1EA or The flash EPROM data is corrupted. Run the
E1EB is displayed on the operator panel. recovery procedure for the flash EPROM.

Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination 163

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Symptom Action
The system stops with a prompt to enter a Enter the password. You are not allowed to
password. continue until a correct password has been
entered. When you have entered a valid
password, wait for one of the other conditions
to occur.
The system stops with an eight-digit error Record the error code(s) and report the
code(s) displayed on the console. problem to the service organization.
The system login prompt is displayed. You may not have pressed the correct key, or
you may not have pressed the key soon
enough when you were to indicate a Service
Mode boot of diagnostic programs. If this was
the case, start over at the beginning of this
step.

If you are sure that you pressed the correct key

in a timely manner, go to Step 7.
The system does not respond when the Go to Step 7.
password is entered.
The system stopped and an indicator is If the indicator (text or icon) represents:
displayed on the system console and an v A keyboard, record error code M0KBD000
eight-digit error code is not displayed. and report the problem to the service
organization.
v Memory, record error code M0MEM002 and
report the problem to the service
organization.
v SCSI, record error code M0CON000 and
report the problem to the service
organization.
v Network, record error code M0NET000 and
report the problem to the service
organization.
v Speaker/Audio, record error code M0BT0000
and report the problem to the service
organization.

164 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Symptom Action
The System Management Services menu is The device or media that you are attempting to
displayed. boot from might be faulty.
1. Check the SMS error log for any errors. To
check the error log:
v Select tools
v Select error log
v If an error is logged, check the time
stamp.
v If the error was logged during the current
boot attempt, record it and report it to
your service representative.
v If no recent error is logged in the error
log, continue to the next step below.
2. If you are attempting to load the Online
Diagnostics, try loading the Standalone
Diagnostics. Otherwise, record error code
M0SCSI01 and report the problem to the
service organization.
The system appears to be stopped, the disk Record error code M0MEM001 and report the
activity light is on continuously, and a beep was problem to the service organization.
heard from the system unit.
The system stops with the message STARTING Report error code M0BT0000.
SOFTWARE PLEASE WAIT displayed.
The message The system will continue the Report error code M0SCSI01.
boot process is displayed continuously on the
system unit’s console.

Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination 165

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Step 6
The diagnostics loaded correctly.

Go to “Problem Determination Using the Standalone or Online Diagnostics” on

page 155.

Step 7
There is a problem with the keyboard.

Find the type of keyboard you are using in the following table. Then follow the
instructions given in the Action column.

Keyboard Type Action

101-key keyboard. Identify by the type of Enter Record error code M0KBD001 and report the
key used. The Enter key is within one problem to the service organization.
horizontal row of keys.
102-key keyboard. Identify by the type of Enter Record error code M0KBD002 and report the
key used. The Enter key extends into two problem to the service organization.
horizontal rows of keys.
Kanji keyboard. Identify by the Japanese Record error code M0KBD003 and report the
characters. problem to the service organization.
ASCII-terminal keyboard. This applies to all Go to the problem-determination documentation
attached terminals. for this type of terminal.

166 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Chapter 9. Repair Action

This chapter describes the steps to replace a failing component and reset the LEDs on
the indicator panel..
1. Replace the failing component with the new component. Refer to Chapter 3 of the
Eserver pSeries 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 Installation Guide for instructions.
2. Log in as root user.
3. At the command line, type diag.
4. Select Task Selection.
5. Select Log Repair Action.
6. Select the device that was repaired. (If the device is not listed, select sysplanar0)

If the Attention LED remains on after you have completed the repair action and reset
the LEDs, call for service.

167
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

168 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Appendix A. Environmental Notices

Product Recycling and Disposal

This unit contains materials such as circuit boards, cables, electromagnetic compatibility
gaskets and connectors which may contain lead and copper/beryllium alloys that require
special handling and disposal at end of life. Before this unit is disposed of, these
materials must be removed and recycled or discarded according to applicable
regulations. IBM offers product-return programs in several countries. For country
specific instructions refer to the following web site:
http://www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/prp.phtml

This product may contain a sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium, nickel metal
hydride, lithium, or lithium ion battery. Consult your user manual or service
manual for specific battery information. The battery must be recycled or disposed
of properly. Recycling facilities may not be available in your area. For information
on disposal of batteries, contact your local waste disposal facility.

In the United States, IBM has established a collection process for reuse, recycling, or
proper disposal of used IBM sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium, nickel metal hydride,
and other battery packs from IBM Equipment. For information on proper disposal of
these batteries, please contact IBM at 1-800-426-4333. Have the IBM part number
listed on the battery available prior to your call.

Environmental Design
The environmental efforts that have gone into the design of this system signify IBM’s
commitment to improve the quality of its products and processes. Some of these
accomplishments include the elimination of the use of Class 1 ozone-depleting
chemicals in the manufacturing process and reductions in manufacturing wastes. For
more information, contact an IBM account representative.

Acoustical Noise Emissions

The equivalent continuous A-weighted sound pressure level at workstations (emission
sound pressure level at the 1-meter bystander positions) does not exceed 70 dB(A).

Der Geräuschpegel der Einheit ist kleiner oder gleich 70 db(A).

169
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Declared Acoustical Noise Emissions

Product Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Declared A-Weighted Sound
Configuration Level, LWAd (B) Pressure Level, <LpAm>(dB) at 1
meter Bystander Position
Operating Idling Operating Idling
7028- 6.1 6.1 44 43
7028- 6.2 5.9 46 44

Notes:
LWAd
1. is the declared (upper limit) sound power level for a random sample of machines. (1B =
10dB)
LpAm
2. is the mean value of the A-weighted sound pressure level at the 1-meter bystander
positions for a random sample of machines.
3. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with
ISO 9296.
4. System Configurations
v 7028–6E4: 1 processor, 2 hard files
v 7028–6C4: 2 processors, 7 hard files, 3 power supplies

170 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Appendix B. Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

The manufacturer may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this
document in other countries. Consult the manufacturer’s representative for information
on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to the
manufacturer’s product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only
that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any intellectual property right of the
manufacturer may be used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate
and verify the operation of any product, program, or service.

The manufacturer may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject
matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you
any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the
manufacturer.

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country
where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: THIS MANUAL IS
PROVIDED ″AS IS″ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in
certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes

are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in
new editions of the publication. The manufacturer may make improvements and/or
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any
time without notice.

Information concerning products made by other than the manufacturer was obtained
from the suppliers of those products, their published announcements, or other publicly
available sources. The manufacturer has not tested those products and cannot confirm
the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to products made
by other than the manufacturer. Questions on the capabilities of products made by other
than the manufacturer should be addressed to the suppliers of those products.

171
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

172 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Appendix C. General Attributes Required When Using a TTY

Terminal
The following general attributes are the default settings for the diagnostic programs. Be
sure your terminal is set to these attributes.

Note: Set these attributes before the diagnostic programs are loaded.

General Setup 3151 3151 3161 /3164 Description

Attributes /11/31/41 /51/61 Settings
Settings Settings
Machine mode 3151 3151 PC 3161 or The diagnostic programs are set
3164 to emulate use of the 3161 ASCII
Display Terminal. If your terminal
can emulate a 5085, 3161 or
3164 terminal, use these attribute
settings. Otherwise, refer to your
operator’s manual, compare the
attribute descriptions with those
of your terminal, and set your
attributes accordingly.
Generated Code Set ASCII
Screen Normal Normal Uses the EIA-232 interface
protocol.
Row and Column 24 x 80 24 x 80 Uses the EIA-232 interface
protocol.
Scroll Jump Jump Jump When the last character on the
bottom line is entered, the screen
moves down one line.
Auto LF Off Off Off For the ″On″ setting, pressing the
Return key moves the cursor to
the first character position of the
next line. For the ″Off″ setting,
pressing the Return key moves
the cursor to the first character
position of the current line. The
CR and LF characters are
generated by the New line
setting.
CRT saver Off Off 10 The ″10″ setting causes the
display screen to go blank if there
is no activity for 10 minutes.
When the system unit sends data
or a key is pressed, the screen
contents display again.

173
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

General Setup 3151 3151 3161 /3164 Description

Attributes /11/31/41 /51/61 Settings
Settings Settings
Line wrap On On On The cursor moves to the first
character position of the next line
in the page after it reaches the
last character position of the
current line in the page.
Forcing insert Off Off
Tab Field Field Field The column tab stops are
ignored, and the tab operation
depends on the field attribute
character positions.
Trace All Both inbound data (data to the
system unit) and outbound data
(data from the system unit) to and
from the main port can be
transferred to the auxiliary port
without disturbing
communications with the system
unit when the Trace key is
pressed.

Additional Communication Attributes

The following communication attributes are for the 3151, 3161, and 3164 terminals.

Communication 3151/11 3151 3161 /3164 Description

Setup Attributes /31/41) /51/61, Settings
Settings Settings
Operating mode Echo Echo Echo Data entered from the keyboard
on the terminal is sent to the
system unit for translation and
then sent back to the display
screen. Sometimes called
conversational mode.
Line speed 9600 bps 9600 bps 9600 bps Uses the 9600 bps (bits per
second) line speed to
communicate with the system
unit.
Word length (bits) 8 8 8 Selects eight bits as a data word
length (byte).
Parity No No No Does not add a parity bit and is
used together with the word
length attribute to form the 8-bit
data word (byte).
Stop bit 1 1 1 Places a bit after a data word
(byte).

174 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Communication 3151/11 3151 3161 /3164 Description

Setup Attributes /31/41) /51/61, Settings
Settings Settings
Turnaround character CR CR CR Selects the carriage return (CR)
character as the line turnaround
character.
Interface EIA-232 EIA-232 EIA-232 Uses the EIA-232 interface
protocol.
Line control IPRTS IPRTS IPRTS Uses the ’permanent request to
send’ (IPRTS) signal to
communicate with system unit.
Break signal (ms) 500 500 500 The terminal sends a break signal
to the system unit within 500 ms
after the Break key is pressed.
Send null suppress On On Trailing null characters are not
sent to the system unit.
Send null On Trailing null characters are sent to
the system unit.
Response delay (ms) 100 100 100 The terminal waits for 100 ms for
the system unit to respond.

Additional Keyboard Attributes

The following keyboard attributes are for the keyboard attached to the 3151, 3161, and
3164 terminals.

Keyboard Setup 3151/11 3151 3161 /3164 Description

Attributes /31/41 /51/61 Settings
Settings Settings
Enter Return Return Return The Enter key functions as the
Return key.
Return New line New line New line The cursor moves to the next line
when the Return key is pressed.
New line CR CR CR The Return key generates the
carriage return (CR) and the line
feed (LF) characters. The line
turnaround occurs after the CR
and LF characters are generated.
Send Page Page Page The contents of the current page
are sent to the system unit when
the Send key is pressed.
Insert character Space Space Space A blank character is inserted
when the Insert key is pressed.

Appendix C. General Attributes Required When Using a TTY Terminal 175

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Additional Printer Attributes

The following printer attributes are for a printer attached to the 3151, 3161, and 3164
terminals.

Printer Setup 3151/11 3151 3161 /3164 Description

Attributes /31/41 /51/61 Settings
Settings Settings
Line speed 9600 9600 9600 Uses 19200 or 9600 bps (bits per
second) line speed to
communicate with the system
unit.
Word length (bits) 8 8 8 Selects eight bits as a data word
length (byte).
Parity Even Even No
Stop bit 1 1 1 Places a bit after a data word
(byte).
Characters ALL ALL
Line end CR-LF
Print View port
Print EOL Off
Print null Off

176 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Appendix D. Firmware Updates

This section provides information and instruction for updating firmware. You may need
to perform these steps if you are installing an option or if your support representative
has instructed you to update your firmware.

Checking the Current Firmware Levels

To check the current levels that are installed on the system, do the following:
1. Log in as root user.
2. Enter the following command:
lscfg -vp | grep alterable
3. Press enter. A report will be produced similar to the following:
ROM Level.(alterable).......ct010507 <=== service processor F/W level
ROM Level.(alterable).......CLT01198 <=== system F/W level
Notes:
1. In the preceding example, if the current version of service processor firmware is
ct010507, the last six characters of the ROM level represent a date in a yymmdd
format, where yy is the last two digits of the year, mm is the month and dd is the day
of the firmware (Julian date).
2. Also in the preceding example, if the current version of system firmware is
CLT01198, the last five characters of the ROM level represent a date in a yyddd
format, where yy is the last two digits of the year and ddd is the Gregorian date of
the firmware.

Check the Web site at http://www.rs6000.ibm.com/support/micro for the latest level of

downloadable firmware. If the version of system firmware installed on your system is
older than (has an earlier date than) the system firmware shown on the web site, you
should consider downloading and applying the update. If the version of service
processor firmware installed on your system is older than (has an earlier date than) the
service processor firmware shown on the Web site, consider downloading and applying
the update.

Updating System Firmware

To update the system firmware, perform the following steps:
1. Log in as root user.
2. If the directory /tmp/fwupdate does not exist, create it by issuing the following
command: mkdir /tmp/fwupdate
3. The firmware update file must be written into the /tmp/fwupdate directory on the
server. This can be done by using the ftp command to get the image from an ftp
server, NFS-mounting the directory on the host server, or downloading it from Web
site at http://www.rs6000.ibm.com/support/micro.

177
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

After the firmware update file has been written into the /tmp/fwupdate directory,
verify its existence by entering the following command:
ls /tmp/fwupdate/cc*.img
The update file name will have the format ccyyddd.img. The cc indicates that this is
a combined image for the server, yy is the last two digits of the year, and ddd is the
Julian date of the update file.
4. After the update file has been written to the /tmp/fwupdate directory, enter the
following commands:
cd /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin
then
./update_flash -f /tmp/fwupdate/ccyyddd.img
Notes:
a. ccyyddd.img is the file you identified in the previous step.
b. Make sure that you include the periods (.) in the commands shown above.
c. AIX commands are case-sensitive. Type them exactly as shown.

You are asked by the system for confirmation to proceed with the firmware update
and the required reboot. If you confirm, the system applies the new firmware,
reboots, and returns to the AIX prompt. This may take up to ten minutes, depending
on the configuration of the system.

Attention: On some systems, the message Wait for rebooting before stopping
may appear on the system display. Do not turn off the system unit until the system
has fully rebooted to the AIX login prompt. If a shutdown is necessary at that time,
log in as root user and issue the shutdown command. While the update is in
progress, you will see Rebooting... on the display for as long as three minutes.

The firmware update is complete.

178 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Appendix E. Service Processor Setup and Test

For your convenience, an example of a basic service processor setup checklist is
included here. Your setup may include more or fewer of the available features, so you
can adjust this checklist for your own application so that it is helpful to you.

Service Processor Setup Checklist

1. Unplug the power cord from the server.
2. Attach a local terminal for this setup procedure.
3. Plug in the system and power on the local terminal.
Attention: Make sure that system power remains off.
4. Start the service processor menus. See Chapter 3, “Using the Service Processor”
on page 25.
5. Set the system name. See “Privileged User Menus” on page 29.
6. Enable surveillance. See .
7. Configure Call-In/Call-Out. See “Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu” on page 50.
8. Exit the service processor menus.
9. Unplug the power cord from the system.
10. Attach modems (if needed). See “Accessing the Service Processor Menus
Remotely” on page 26.
11. Plug in the system.
Attention: Make sure that the system power remains off.
12. Test both of the following:
v Call-In, see “Testing Call-In” on page 180
v Call-Out, see “Testing Call-Out” on page 180

Your service processor is now ready for use.

179
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Testing the Setup

This section contains sample testing procedures to help ensure that your setup is
working.

These tests include communicating with the server operating system. Before you start,
ensure that the necessary serial port(s) is configured. If you need assistance, refer to
“Serial Port Configuration” on page 181.

The server should be powered off as a result of the “Service Processor Setup
Checklist” on page 179.

Testing Call-In
1. At your remote terminal, call in to your server. Your server answers and offers you
the Service Processor Main Menu after requesting your privileged access password.
2. Select System Power Control.
3. Select Power-On System.
When you are asked if you wish to continue powering on the system, type Y.
4. After the system firmware and operating system have initialized the server, the login
prompt displays at your remote terminal if you set up Seamless Modem Transfer
(refer to “Transfer of a Modem Session” on page 188 for more information). This
may take several minutes. When the login prompt displays, you have successfully
called the service processor.
5. Type logout to disconnect from the operating system. The message No Carrier
displays on your remote terminal.
6. Call your server again. The operating system answers and offers you the login
prompt. If these tests are successful, call-in is working.
7. Log in and type shutdown to shut down your server.
8. The message No Carrier displays on your remote terminal.

Testing Call-Out
During the setup, you entered your phone numbers for the pager (on page 55) and
customer voice (on page 55). These numbers are used for this test.
1. Your remote terminal is disconnected as a result of the Call-In test.
2. Call your server again.
3. At the service processor main menu, select Call-In/Call-Out Setup menu, then
select Call-Out test. This action causes a simulated error condition for the purposes
of this test.
4. After a few moments, a message displays, regarding an illegal entry. Press Enter to
clear the message and return to the main menu.
5. When your telephone rings, answer the call. You should hear the sound of a
telephone being dialed. Your computer is trying to page you.

If this test is successful, call-out is working correctly.

180 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Return to the “Telephone Number Setup Menu” on page 54 to enter the actual
telephone numbers your server will use for reporting problems.

Serial Port Configuration

To configure the serial port on an AIX system, run the following from an AIX console:
1. Log in as root user.
2. To determine if you have any serial ports already configured, type:
lsdev -Cc tty

If no serial ports are configured, none are listed. If you want to configure serial
ports that are not listed, continue with the remaining steps.
3. Identify the serial port(s) with the modem(s).
4. Type smit tty
5. Select add tty
6. Select RS232
7. Select Baud rate 9600 or higher.
8. Select login enable and set the flow control to RTS.
9. Commit the selections and set up any other needed serial ports.
10. Exit SMIT.

Appendix E. Service Processor Setup and Test 181

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

182 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Appendix F. Modem Configurations

The service processor is designed to place little demand on an attached modem,
thereby increasing the setup and connection success rates.

Sample Modem Configuration Files

This appendix contains information about several sample modem configuration files that
either work directly with your modem or provide a good starting point for a custom
setup.

The sample modem configuration files are located in your service processor firmware in
the /usr/share/modems subdirectory (if your server is using AIX) with the following
names. A listing of each specific file is included in this appendix.

Generic Modem Configuration Files

AIX File Name Service Processor Firmware File Name
modem_z.cfg modem_z_sp
modem_z0.cfg modem_z0_sp
modem_f.cfg modem_f_sp
modem_f0.cfg modem_f0_sp
modem_f1.cfg modem_f1_sp

Specific Modem Configuration Files

AIX File Name Service Processor Firmware File Name
modem_m0.cfg modem_m0_sp
modem_m1.cfg modem_m1_sp

Use the following selection procedures and your modem manual to determine which of
the configuration files is suitable for your use.

183
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Configuration File Selection

Use the following steps to select a configuration file:
1. Is your modem an IBM 7852-400?
If Yes, use modem configuration file modem_m0.cfg and go to step 7 on page 185.

Note: The IBM 7852-400 modem has DIP switches on the right side of the unit.
See “IBM 7852-400 DIP Switch Settings” on page 187 for the correct switch
settings.

If No, continue with step 2.

2. Is your modem an IBM 7857-017?
If Yes, use modem configuration file modem_m1.cfg and go to step 7 on page 185.

Note: The IBM 7857-017 modem has two telephone line connections on the back
of the unit. One is marked LL (for Leased Line), and the other is marked
PTSN (for Public Telephone Switched Network). The service processor
expects to use the modem on the public network, so the telephone line
should attach to the PTSN connector.

If No, continue with step 3.

3. Does your modem respond to the extended command set (prefixed with &)?
If Yes, go to step 5.
If No, continue with step 4.
4. Does your modem respond to:
v ATZ reset command
or
v ATZn reset commands, where n can be 0, 1, and so on?
If ATZ, configuration file modem_z.cfg is recommended.
If ATZn, configuration file modem_z0.cfg is recommended.
Go to step 7 on page 185.
5. Does your modem command set include a test for V.42 error correction at the
remote modem (often called “Auto-Reliable Mode”)?
If Yes, disable this test. You can use sample configuration files
/usr/share/modem_m0.cfg or /usr/share/modem_m1.cfg as models to help you
create a file for your particular modem. See “Customizing the Modem Configuration
Files” on page 186 for more information. Go to step 7 on page 185.
If No, go to step 6.
6. Does your modem respond to:
v AT&F reset command
or
v AT&Fn reset commands, where n can be 0, 1, and so on?

184 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

If AT&F, configuration file modem_f.cfg is recommended.

If AT&Fn, configuration file modem_f0.cfg or modem_f1.cfg is recommended,
depending on which provides the hardware flow control profile.
7. You have completed selection of the configuration file.
If your modem configuration selection is not available in the Service Processor
Modem Configuration Menu, you must access it through the Configure Remote
Maintenance Policy Service Aid.
If you find it necessary to adjust any of these configuration files, use the manual
provided with your modem to accomplish that task. It is recommended you select
settings that enable hardware flow control and respond to DTR.

Note: Some older modems do not respond to the X0 or &R1 commands. Edit out
these commands from the modem configuration file if yours is such a
modem. See your modem manual for more information.

Some modems, such as the IBM 7857-017, are not designed for the paging function.
Although they can be used for paging, they return an error message when they do not
get the expected response from another modem. Therefore, even though the paging
was successful, the error message causes the service processor to retry, continuing to
place pager calls for the number of retries specified in the Call-Out Policy Setup Menu.
These retries result in redundant pages.

Appendix F. Modem Configurations 185

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Examples for Using the Generic Sample Modem Configuration Files

The following table contains information to help you determine which modem
configuration file to use with various modems.

Modem Setup Z Setup Z0 Setup F Setup F0 Setup F1

(Rare)
AT&T DataPort 2001 X
(Ring interrupt only on
first ring)
Bocamodem 1440E X
Hayes Smart Modem X
300
IBM 5841 X
IBM 5843 X
IBM 7851 X
IBM 7852-10 X
IBM 7855 X
USRobotics X
36.6K Sportster
Zoom V.32 X

Customizing the Modem Configuration Files

You can create your own modem configuration files or modify the samples provided.
After you customize your modem configuration files, you must access them through the
Configure Remote Maintenance Policy Service Aid rather than from the service
processor menus.

Note: If you have already set up your serial ports, line speeds, authorizations, and
telephone numbers from the service processor menus, use the service aid to
specify your customized modem configuration files.

If you have not already set up your serial ports, line speeds, authorizations, and
telephone numbers from the service processor menus, use the service aids to
set them while you specify your customized modem configuration files.

To disable Auto-Reliable Mode testing of the remote modem, use the sample modem
configuration file /usr/share/modems/modem_f.cfg as a model that you can modify, as
follows:
1. Find the necessary command in your modem manual.
2. Copy the /usr/share/modems/modem_f.cfg file to a new file with a different name
(for example, modem_fx.cfg).
3. In the new file (modem_fx.cfg), change the line Send "ATE0T\r" to Send
"ATcccE0T\r" where ccc is the added command as specified in your modem
manual, as follows:
Change the third line of each of the following stanzas:
v condout

186 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

v condin
v ripo
4. Save the changes.

IBM 7852-400 DIP Switch Settings

If you are using a 7852-400 modem to enable service processor communications, for
proper operation, the dual inline package (DIP) switches must be set according to the
following table:

Switch Position Function

1 Up Force DTR
2 Up Flow Control &E4
3 Down Result Codes Enabled
4 Down Modem Emulation Disabled
5 Up Auto Answer Enabled
6 Up Maximum Throughput Enabled
7 Up RTS Normal Functions
8 Down Enable Command Mode
9 Down Remote Digital Loopback Test Enabled
10 Up Dial-Up Line Enabled
11 *Up AT Responses Enabled (Extended Responses Disabled)
12 *Down Asynchronous Operation

13 Up 28.8KB Line Speed

14 Up

15 Up CD and DSR Normal Functions

16 Up 2-Wire Leased Line Enabled
* Only switches 11 and 12 are changed from the factory default settings.

Xon/Xoff Modems
Some early modems assume software flow control (Xon/Xoff) between the computer
and the modem. Modems with this design send extra characters during and after the
transmitted data. The service processor cannot accept these extra characters. If your
configuration includes such a modem, your functional results may be unpredictable.

The sample modem configuration files included in this appendix do not support these
modems, so custom configuration files are necessary. Anchor Automation 2400E is an
example of such a modem.

If you experience unexplainable performance problems that may be due to Xon/Xoff

characters, it is recommended that you upgrade your modem.

Ring Detection
Most modems produce an interrupt request each time they detect a ring signal. Some
modems generate an interrupt only on the first ring signal that they receive. AT&T
DataPort 2001 is an example of such a modem.

Appendix F. Modem Configurations 187

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

The service processor uses the ring interrupt request to count the number of rings when
Ring Indicate Power-On (RIPO) is enabled. If your modem produces an interrupt on
only the first ring, set Ring Indicate Power-On to start on the first ring. Otherwise, you
can choose to start Ring Indicate Power-On on any ring count.

Terminal Emulators
The service processor is compatible with simple ASCII terminals, and therefore
compatible with most emulators. When a remote session is handed off from the service
processor to the operating system, agreement between terminal emulators becomes
important.

The server’s operating system will have some built-in terminal emulators. You may also
have a commercially available terminal emulation. It is important that the local and host
computers select the same or compatible terminal emulators so that the key
assignments and responses match, ensuring successful communications and control.

For best formatting, choose line wrap in your terminal emulator setup.

Recovery Procedures
Situations such as line noises and power surges can sometimes cause your modem to
enter an undefined state. When it is being used for dial-in, dial-out or ring indicate
power-on, your modem is initialized each time one of these actions is expected. If one
of these environmental conditions occur after your modem has been initialized, it might
be necessary to recover your modem to a known state.

If your modem communicates correctly with remote users, it is probably in control. It

may be wise to occasionally change some of the functional settings and then change
them back, just for the sense of security that the modem is communicating, and to
ensure it has been initialized recently.

If your system is particularly difficult to access physically, another strategy is to protect it

with an Uninterruptible Power Source (UPS) and a phone-line surge protector.

In case recovery becomes necessary, shut down your system using established
procedures. Disconnect the power cable and press the power button to drain
capacitance while power is disconnected. Disconnect and reconnect modem power, and
then reconnect system power to completely reinitialize your system.

Transfer of a Modem Session

Because many modem command variations exist, the sample modem configuration files
located at the end of this appendix have been written to capture the largest number of
workable modem settings.

The modem command &Dn (where n is a number) generally sets the modem response
to the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal from the server’s serial port. The desired
response is that the modem will hold a connection while DTR is enabled, and drop the
connection when DTR is released. Using this mechanism, the server hangs up on a
connection under normal conditions.

188 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Consult your modem manual for its specific response scheme for the &Dn command.

Two strategies are available for dealing with the modem’s response to DTR:
v Recovery
v Prevention

Before you use one of these strategies, determine if your server’s modem is set up
correctly to respond to DTR.

With the remote terminal connected to serial port 1 and defined as the Primary Console
Device, there are two tests you can perform:
1. Will the modem drop the connection after the System initialization complete
message displays at the remote terminal?
If Yes, the modem is set up correctly.
If No, try another &Dn setting for your server’s modem. See your modem manual
for this information. The &Dn command appears in three places each in three of the
sample modem configuration files, as follows:
2. Will the server’s modem disconnect when the power drops? You can make this
observation at the remote terminal by commanding your server to shut down and
power off. (Use the AIX command shutdown -F.) Watch for the message NO
CARRIER on your remote terminal.
If Yes, this is the correct response. The modem is set up correctly.
If No, try another &Dn setting for your server’s modem. See your model manual for
this information. The &Dn command appears in three places each in three of the
sample modem configuration files. Only the following sample modem configuration
files contain the &Dn command (in three places each):
v modem_f.cfg
v modem_f0.cfg
v modem_f1.cfg
If you are using modem_z.cfg or modem_z0.cfg, you cannot control DTR response.
If your remote terminal does not disconnect after logging off, you must command
the remote terminal emulator to hang up. This then breaks the connection.

Recovery Strategy
The recovery strategy consists of making two calls to establish a remote session. This
solution is the easiest to implement and allows more freedom for configuring your
server’s serial ports.

To set up a remote terminal session, dial into the service processor and start the
system. After the operating system is loaded and initialized, the connection will be
dropped. At this point, call the server back and the operating system will answer and
offer you the login prompt.

Appendix F. Modem Configurations 189

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Prevention Strategy
The disconnect is caused by the operating system when it initializes the Primary
Console. The tests listed in “Transfer of a Modem Session” on page 188 are conducted
with the remote terminal selected as the primary console to manifest the modem’s
response to DTR transitions.
v If a local ASCII terminal or a graphics console is to be a permanent part of your
server, then make one of them the primary console. Your remote terminal will no
longer experience the connection loss.
v If a local console is not a permanent part of your server, you can still assign either
the unused graphics console or the unused serial port as the primary console. This
gives you the desired seamless connection at your remote terminal.
v If you choose to use the unused serial port as the primary console, some initialization
traffic will be sent to any serial device attached to that port. As a result, that serial
device’s connection and function could be affected. These impacts may make that
port unattractive for devices other than a temporary local ASCII terminal.

190 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Modem Configuration Sample Files

Sample File modem_m0.cfg

#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP: modem_m0
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file specifically for IBM 7852-400
# modem with Auto-Reliable feature. This feature must be turned off
# for Catcher calls. This example uses the AT&F reset command to
# choose the factory defaults.
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#
#
# The modem has configuration switches. They should be set to the
# factory default settings, except switches 11 and 12. These must be
# to UP ("AT" responses) and DOWN (Asynchronous operation), respectively.

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 10
CallDelay 120
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %R Return phone number
#
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "AT&F&E2E0T\r" # Reset to factory defaults

# Reliable mode
# Echo off
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "AT&E12&E14\r" # Disable pacing
# Disable data compression
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "AT&SF1&S0S9=1\r" # DSR independent of CD
# Force DSR on.
# CD respond time=100ms
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATV0S0=0\r" # Numeric response code
# Auto-Answer off
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.

# %N from Call Home setup.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "33\r" or "31\r" or "28\r" or "26\r" or "24\r" or "21\r" or
"19\r" or "13\r" or "12\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 60
done

retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

# Expect a connection response.
expect "33\r" or "31\r" or "28\r" or "26\r" or "24\r" or "21\r" or
"19\r" or "13\r" or "12\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 60
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.

Appendix F. Modem Configurations 191

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

send "+++" # Assure command mode.

delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATH0T\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0Q1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "0\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "AT&F&E2E0T\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

# Reliable mode
# Echo off
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "AT&E12&E14\r" # Disable pacing
# Disable data compression
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful
send "AT&SF1&S0S9=1\r" # DSR independent of CD.
# Force DSR on.
# CD respond time=100ms
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATV0S0=2\r" # Numberic response code
# Answer on 2nd ring
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.

expect "2\r" timeout 10 # Pickup 2nd ring or timeout
# Expect a connection response.
expect "33\r" or "31\r" or "28\r" or "26\r" or "24\r" or "21\r" or
"19\r" or "13\r" or "12\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 60
done

page: send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r" # %N = pager call center number

# Add enough commas to wait for
# time to enter paging number.
# %R = paging number
expect "0\r" timeout 60 # Confirm successful command.
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "ATH0\r" # Hang up.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "AT&F&E2E0T\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

# Reliable mode
# Echo off
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "AT&E12&E14\r" # Disable pacing
# Disable data compression
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
send "AT&SF1&S0S9=1\r" # DSR independent of CD.
# Force DSR on.
# CD respond time=100ms
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATV0S0=0\r" # Numeric response code
# Auto Answer OFF
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
done #

error: # Handle unexpected modem

# responses.
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

192 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Sample File modem_m1.cfg

#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP modem_m1
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file specifically for IBM 7857-017 modem with
# Auto-Reliable feature. This feature must be turned off for Catcher calls.
# This example uses the AT&F reset command to choose the factory defaults.
#
# To allow dial commands for digital pagers, it is necessary to reduce
# the number of characters in the dial command. Each comma (delay) has
# been set to 6 seconds (S8=6) for that reason.
#
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 10
CallDelay 120
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %R Return phone number
#
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "AT&F*E0E0\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

# *E0=data compression disabled
# E0=echo disabled
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "AT#F0*Q2S8=6\r" # Trellis modulation disabled
# Retrain with adaptive rate
# Set ,=6second
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful
send "ATV0X0S0=0\r" # Numeric response code
# AT compatible messages
# Auto-Answer disabled
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.

# %N from Call Home setup.
expect "1\r" busy "7\r" timeout 60 # Expect a connection response.
done

retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

expect "1\r" busy "7\r" timeout 60 # Expect a connection response.
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATH0\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0Q1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "0\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "AT&F*E0E0\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

Appendix F. Modem Configurations 193

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

# *E0=data compression disabled

# E0=echo disabled
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "AT#F0*Q2\r" # Trellis modulation disabled
# Retrain with adaptive rate
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful
send "ATV0X0S0=2\r" # Numeric response code
# AT compatible messages
# Answer on 2nd ring
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.

expect "2\r" timeout 10 # Pick up second ring
# or timeout.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "1\r" timeout 60
done

page: send "ATD%N,%R\r" # %N = pager call center number

# commas=6sec wait time to
# enter paging number.
# %R = return number
expect "0\r" or "3\r" timeout 30 # Confirm successful command.
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATH0\r" # Hang up.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "AT&F*E0E0\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

# *E0=data compression disabled
# E0=echo disabled
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "AT#F0*Q2\r" # Trellis modulation disabled
# Retrain with adaptive rate
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
send "ATV0X0S0=0\r" # Numeric response code
# AT compatible messages
# Auto-Answer disabled
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
done #

error: # Handle unexpected modem

# responses.
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

194 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Sample File modem_z.cfg

#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP Z
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many early Hayes* compatible modems.
# This example uses the ATZ reset command to choose the factory defaults.
# This setup will work for many modems, but it is required for early vintage
# modems which respond to neither the ATZ0 reset command nor the extended (&)
# commands. Refer to your modem manual.
#
# * Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the
# factory default settings.

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 10
CallDelay 120
# AT Attention Code , Inserts delay in dialing commands
# Z Reset to factory defaults Q0 Turn on responses
# E0 Turn echo off Q1 Turn off responses
# V0 Use numeric responses S0=0 Automatic answer inhibit
# +++ Escape to command mode S0=2 Answer on second ring
# H0 Hang-up T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a
# no op to maintain program synchronization
# when modem may/will echo the commands.
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %P Paging phone number
# %S Modem speed (available to users)
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:
# 16, 15, 12, 10, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; 0=OK
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "ATZQ0T\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0T\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQ0V0T\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATS0=0\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.

# %N from Call Home setup.

# Expect a connection response.

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 60
done

retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

# Expect a connection response.

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"

Appendix F. Modem Configurations 195

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

timeout 60
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATH0T\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0Q1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "0\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "ATZQ0T\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0T\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQ0V0T\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATS0=2\r" # Set AutoAnswer ON
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.

expect "2\r" timeout 10 # Pick up second ring
# or timeout.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"
timeout 60
done

page: send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r" # %N = pager call center number

# Add enough commas to wait for
# time to enter paging number.
# %R = paging number

# Confirm successful command.

expect "0\r" timeout 60
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "ATH0T\r" # Hang up.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "ATZQ0T\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0T\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQ0V0T\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATS0=0\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done # RI Power On enabled.

error: # Handle unexpected modem

# responses.
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

196 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Sample File modem_z0.cfg

#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP Z0
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for some early Hayes* compatible modems.
# This example uses the ATZ0 reset command to choose the factory defaults.
# This setup is recommended for modems that will respond to the ATZ0 command
# and which do not respond to the extended (&) commands. Refer to your modem
# manual.
#
# * Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the
# factory default settings.

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 10
CallDelay 120
# AT Attention Code , Inserts delay in dialing commands
# Z0 Reset. Restore Profile 0 Q0 Turn on responses
# E0 Turn echo off Q1 Turn off responses
# V0 Use numeric responses S0=0 Automatic answer inhibit
# +++ Escape to command mode S0=2 Answer on second ring
# H0 Hang-up X0=0 Limit modem response codes
# T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a
# no op to maintain program synchronization
# when modem may/will echo the commands.
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %P Paging phone number
# %S Modem speed (available to users)
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:
# 16, 15, 12, 10, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; 0=OK
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "ATZ0Q0T\r" # Reset modem. Select profile 0

ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0T\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATS0=0\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.

# %N from Call Home setup.

# Expect a connection response.

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 60
done

retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

# Expect a connection response.

Appendix F. Modem Configurations 197

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 60
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATH0T\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0Q1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "0\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "ATZ0Q0T\r" # Reset modem. Select profile 0

ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0T\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATS0=2\r" # Set AutoAnswer ON
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.

expect "2\r" timeout 10 # Pick up second ring
# or timeout.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"
timeout 60
done

page: send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r" # %N = pager call center number

# Add enough commas to wait for
# time to enter paging number.
# %R = paging number

# Confirm successful command.

expect "0\r" timeout 60
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "ATH0T\r" # Hang up.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "ATZ0Q0T\r" # Reset modem. Select profile 0

ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0T\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATS0=0\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done # RI Power On enabled.

error: # Handle unexpected modem

# responses.
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

198 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Sample File modem_f.cfg

#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP F
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayes* compatible modems.
# This example uses the AT&F reset command to choose the factory defaults.
# This set up is preferred for modems with extended (&) commands. For early
# vintage modems, setup Z or Z0 is recommended. If your modem responds to
# the extended (&) commands and to factory default choices (&Fn), setup file
# F0 or F1 is recommended.
#
# * Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the
# factory default settings.

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 10
CallDelay 120
# AT Attention Code , Inserts delay in dialing commands
# &F Reset to default profile Q0 Turn on responses
# E0 Turn echo off Q1 Turn off responses
# V0 Use numeric responses S0=0 Automatic answer inhibit
# +++ Escape to command mode S0=2 Answer on second ring
# H0 Hang-up X0=0 Limit modem response codes
# T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a
# no op to maintain program synchronization
# when modem may/will echo the commands.
#
# &C1 Detect CD &D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %P Paging phone number
# %S Modem speed (available to users)
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:
# 16, 15, 12, 10, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; 0=OK
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "AT&FQ0T\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0T\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATS0=0\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2\r" # Detect carrier and DTR.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.

# %N from Call Home setup.

# Expect a connection response.

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 60

Appendix F. Modem Configurations 199

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

done

retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

# Expect a connection response.

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 60
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATH0T\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0Q1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "0\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "AT&FQ0T\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0T\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATS0=2\r" # Set AutoAnswer ON
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2\r" # Detect carrier and DTR.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.

expect "2\r" timeout 10 # Pick up second ring
# or timeout.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"
timeout 60
done

page: send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r" # %N = pager call center number

# Add enough commas to wait for
# time to enter paging number.
# %R = paging number

# Confirm successful command.

expect "0\r" timeout 60
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "ATH0T\r" # Hang up.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "AT&FQ0T\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0T\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATS0=0\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2\r" # Detect carrier and DTR.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done # RI Power On enabled.

error: # Handle unexpected modem

200 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

# responses.
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

Appendix F. Modem Configurations 201

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Sample File modem_f0.cfg

#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP F0
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayes* compatible modems.
# This example uses the AT&F0 reset command to choose the factory defaults.
# This set up is preferred for modems with extended (&) commands. For early
# vintage modems, setup Z or Z0 is recommended. If your modem responds to
# the extended (&) commands and to factory default choices (&Fn), but doesn’t
# work properly with this setup file, setup F1 is recommended.
#
# * Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the
# factory default settings.

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 10
CallDelay 120
# AT Attention Code , Inserts delay in dialing commands
# &F0 Reset. Restore profile 0 Q0 Turn on responses
# E0 Turn echo off Q1 Turn off responses
# V0 Use numeric responses S0=0 Automatic answer inhibit
# +++ Escape to command mode S0=2 Answer on second ring
# H0 Hang-up X0=0 Limit modem response codes
# T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a
# no op to maintain program synchronization
# when modem may/will echo the commands.
#
# &C1 Detect CD &D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)
# &R1 Ignore RTS (CTS)
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %P Paging phone number
# %S Modem speed (available to users)
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:
# 16, 15, 12, 10, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; 0=OK
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "AT&F0Q0T\r" # Reset modem. Select profile 0

ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0T\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATS0=0\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.

# %N from Call Home setup.

# Expect a connection response.

202 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 60
done

retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

# Expect a connection response.

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 60
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATH0T\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0Q1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "0\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "AT&F0Q0T\r" # Reset modem. Select profile 0

ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0T\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATS0=2\r" # Set AutoAnswer ON
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.

expect "2\r" timeout 10 # Pick up second ring
# or timeout.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"
timeout 60
done

page: send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r" # %N = pager call center number

# Add enough commas to wait for
# time to enter paging number.
# %R = paging number

# Confirm successful command.

expect "0\r" timeout 60
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "ATH0T\r" # Hang up.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "AT&F0Q0T\r" # Reset modem. Select profile 0

ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0T\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATS0=0\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.

Appendix F. Modem Configurations 203

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

done # RI Power On enabled.

error: # Handle unexpected modem

# responses.
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

204 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Sample File modem_f1.cfg

#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP F1
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayes* compatible modems.
# This example uses the AT&F1 reset command to choose the factory defaults.
# This set up is for modems with extended (&) commands and which do not work
# properly with setup F0. For early vintage modems, setup Z or Z0 is
# recommended.
#
# * Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the
# factory default settings.

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 10
CallDelay 120
# AT Attention Code , Inserts delay in dialing commands
# &F1 Reset. Restore profile 1 Q0 Turn on responses
# E0 Turn echo off Q1 Turn off responses
# V0 Use numeric responses S0=0 Automatic answer inhibit
# +++ Escape to command mode S0=2 Answer on second ring
# H0 Hang-up X0=0 Limit modem response codes
# T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a
# no op to maintain program synchronization
# when modem may/will echo the commands.
#
# &C1 Detect CD &D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)
# &R1 Ignore RTS (CTS)
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %P Paging phone number
# %S Modem speed (available to users)
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:
# 16, 15, 12, 10, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; 0=OK
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "AT&F1Q0T\r" # Reset modem. Select profile 1

ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0T\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATS0=0\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.

# %N from Call Home setup.

# Expect a connection response.

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"

Appendix F. Modem Configurations 205

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

timeout 60
done

retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

# Expect a connection response.

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 60
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATH0T\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0Q1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "0\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "AT&F1Q0T\r" # Reset modem. Select profile 1

ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0T\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATS0=2\r" # Set AutoAnswer ON
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.

expect "2\r" timeout 10 # Pick up second ring
# or timeout.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"
timeout 60
done

page: send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r" # %N = pager call center number

# Add enough commas to wait for
# time to enter paging number.
# %R = paging number

# Confirm successful command.

expect "0\r" timeout 60
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "ATH0T\r" # Hang up.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "AT&F1Q0T\r" # Reset modem. Select profile 1

ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATE0T\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATS0=0\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "0\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done # RI Power On enabled.

206 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

error: # Handle unexpected modem

# responses.
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

Appendix F. Modem Configurations 207

 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

208 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Index
diagnostics (continued)
Numerics considerations, diagnostics 149
3.5–inch diskette drive
loading 150
using 17
loading, diagnostics 150
7135 RAIDiant array 147
NIM standalone diagnostics 92
7318 server service aid 148
online 91
A online diagnostics from HMC 100, 152
online diagnostics modes of operation 97
acoustical
online diagnostics service mode 97
noise
operating considerations 91
emissions 169
running, from HMC 100, 152
adapter
service mode 100, 152
parameters 82
standalone 91
AIX operating system documentation 85
standalone diagnostics 102
alter/display bootlist 121
stopping, diagnostics 101, 151, 153
attributes required for TTY terminal 173
verification procedure, running 101, 151, 153
B verification, additional 101, 151, 153
battery verifying hardware 149
disposal, recycling 169 display/alter bootlist 121
boot device
select 86
E
boot mode menu 42 electrical safety xi
boot sequence 87 laser compliance statement xiii
emissions
C noise 169
call-in ergonomic information xviii
testing 180 error log
call-in/call-out setup menu 50 display 79
call-out error logs
testing 180 service processor 71
call-out (call-home) 69 exit
call-out policy setup menu 56 system management services 89
CD-ROM drive
using 19
F
component LEDs 10 fibre channel RAID service aids 128
configure firmware 64
memory 66 level 64
processor 66 update 64
console firmware updates 177
select 84 system 63
console mirroring 70 flash SK-NET FDDI firmware 129
enable/disable 33
customer account setup menu 57
G
general user menu 27
D H
deconfigure
hardware problem determination 155
memory 66
HMC 84
processor 66
device
boot 86
I
install device
install 86
select 86
diagnostics 91, 149

209
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

IP parameters 81 modem (continued)

configurations 183
K transfer 188
keyboards modem_f.cfg, sample file 199
using 14 modem_f0.cfg, sample file 202
modem_f1.cfg, sample file 205
L modem_m0.cfg, sample file 191
language modem_m1.cfg, sample file 193
select 89 modem_z.cfg, sample file 195
language selection menu 49 modem_z0.cfg, sample file 197
laser compliance statement xiii mouse
laser safety information xiii using 15
LCD progress indicator log 72 multiboot 85
LED
indicator N
menu 48 network service aid 135
LEDs NIM standalone diagnostics 92
component 10 noise
resetting 13 emissions 169
loading diagnostics 150
local area network service aid 135 O
log repair action service aid 135 OK prompt 89
online diagnostics 91
M online publications xvii
memory operating system documentation, AIX 85
configure 66 operational phases
deconfigure 66 service processor 73
memory configuration/deconfiguration menu 45 operator panel 7, 9, 10
menu
boot mode 42 P
call-in/call-out 50 parameters
call-out policy setup 56 adapter 82
customer account setup 57 IP 81
general service processor
user 27 service mode 57
language selection 49 password
LED indicator 48 utilities 78
main 29 passwords 32
memory configuration/deconfiguration 45 general
modem configuration 51 change 33
OS surveillance privileged
setup 34 change 33
power control network utilities 48 ping 83
privileged power control network utilities menu 48
user 29 power-on
processor configuration/deconfiguration 44 methods 58
reboot/restart policy setup 40 primary console 190
ring indicate 39 privileged user menus 29
serial port selection 52 problem determination
serial port speed setup 53 using the standalone or online diagnostics 155, 162
setup 31 when unable to load diagnostics 162
system information 43 processor
system power control 38 configure 66
telephone setup 54 deconfigure 66
modem processor configuration/deconfiguration menu 44
configuration file selection 184 product disposal 169

210 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

publications, online xvii service processor (continued)

procedures in service mode 57
R processor configuration/deconfiguration menu 44
reading the operator panel display 9 reboot/restart policy setup menu 40
reboot/restart policy setup menu 40 reboot/restart recovery 60
recycling 169 ring indicate power-on menu 39
related publications xvii serial port selection menu 52
remote initial program serial port snoop setup menu 35
load serial port speed setup menu 53
setup 80 settings
repair action 12, 167 saving and restoring 26
repair log service aid 135 setup 179
resetting the LEDs 13 setup checklist 179
restart recovery 60 setup menu 31
RETAIN 57 system information menu 43
retries 56 system power control menu 38
ring indicate power-on menu 39 telephone setup menu 54
run exercisers 137 test 179
service processor feature
S using 23
safety notices xi setup menu 31
SCSI software
utilities 84 default 86
serial port select 85
selection menu 52 SSA service aid 143
snoop setup menu 35 standalone diagnostics 91
speed setup menu 53 starting the system unit 9
service director feature stopping the system unit 9
using 23 surveillance
service processor 25 monitoring 67
access system features 1
local 26 system firmware updates 63, 177
remote 26 system information menu 43
boot mode menu 42 system management services 77
call-in/call-out setup menu 50 display error log 79
call-out call-home 69 exit 89
call-out policy setup menu 56 multiboot 85
checklist 179 OK prompt 89
console mirroring 70 password utilities 78
customer account setup menu 57 remote initial program load setup 80
error logs 71 SCSI utilities 84
general user menu 27 select console 84
language selection menu 49 select language 89
main menu 29 system power-on methods 58
memory configuration/deconfiguration menu 45 system unit
menus 25 starting 9
modem configuration menu 51 stopping 9
monitoring - surveillance 67
operational phases 73 T
OS surveillance setup menu 34 telephone setup menu 54
parameters testing the setup
service mode 57 call-in 180
passwords 32 call-out 180
power control network utilities menu 48 trademarks xviii
privileged user menus 29 transfer of a modem session 188

Index 211
 Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

TTY terminal attributes

general 173
TTY terminal attributes required for diagnostics 173

U
update system flash 147
utilities
SCSI 84

V
verifying hardware operation 149
virtual terminal window 84

W
web sites
AIX library 85
ergonomic information xviii
Web sites
firmware updates 63, 64
microcode updates 63, 64

212 Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4 User’s Guide
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You
Eserver pSeries 630 Model 6C4 and Model 6E4
User’s Guide

Publication No. SA38-0606-00

Overall, how satisfied are you with the information in this book?

Very Satisfied Satisfied Neutral Dissatisfied Very

Dissatisfied
Overall satisfaction h h h h h

How satisfied are you that the information in this book is:

Very Satisfied Satisfied Neutral Dissatisfied Very

Dissatisfied
Accurate h h h h h
Complete h h h h h
Easy to find h h h h h
Easy to understand h h h h h
Well organized h h h h h
Applicable to your tasks h h h h h

Please tell us how we can improve this book:

Thank you for your responses. May we contact you? h Yes h No

When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Name Address

Company or Organization

Phone No.
 _________________________________________________________________________________
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You Cut or Fold
SA38-0606-00 IBMR Along Line

Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape

_____________________________________________________________________________

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

Information Development
Department H6DS-905-6C006
11400 Burnet Road
Austin, TX 78758-3493

_____________________________________________________________________________
Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape

Cut or Fold
SA38-0606-00 Along Line
IBMR

Approval Copy--June 8, 2002,5:10 p.m.,--IBM Confidential

Printed in U.S.A.

July 2002

SA38-0606-00
Spine information:

Eserver pSeries 630 Model Eserver p Series 630 Model 6C4 and
IBM 6C4 and Model 6E4 Model 6E4 User’s Guide SA38-0606-00